[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2006104402A1 - Compositions d'antagonistes du cuivre - Google Patents

Compositions d'antagonistes du cuivre Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2006104402A1
WO2006104402A1 PCT/NZ2006/000059 NZ2006000059W WO2006104402A1 WO 2006104402 A1 WO2006104402 A1 WO 2006104402A1 NZ 2006000059 W NZ2006000059 W NZ 2006000059W WO 2006104402 A1 WO2006104402 A1 WO 2006104402A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
copper
triethylenetetramine
clo alkyl
composition
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/NZ2006/000059
Other languages
English (en)
Inventor
Garth James Smith Cooper
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Protemix Corp Ltd
Original Assignee
Protemix Corp Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Protemix Corp Ltd filed Critical Protemix Corp Ltd
Publication of WO2006104402A1 publication Critical patent/WO2006104402A1/fr
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/13—Amines
    • A61K31/132—Amines having two or more amino groups, e.g. spermidine, putrescine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P39/00—General protective or antinoxious agents
    • A61P39/04—Chelating agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/12—Antihypertensives

Definitions

  • compositions containing a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist compound or a salt or prodrug thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent or a salt or prodrug thereof, articles and kits and delivery devices containing such compositions, and tablets and capsules and formulations comprising such compositions.
  • the invention also relates to methods of using such compositions to treat subjects suffering from or at risk for various diseases, disorders, and conditions, including pre-hypertension, hypertension (including essential hypertension and grades 1, 2 and 3 hypertension) and related cardiovascular diseases; secondary hypertension; malignant hypertension; isolated systolic hypertension; impaired glucose tolerance; impaired fasting glucose; diabetes, including type 1 and type 2 diabetes, and their complications; insulin resistance; Syndrome X; obesity and other weight related disorders; cardiomyopathy, including diabetic cardiomyopathy; atherosclerosis; coronary heart disease; diseases, disorders or conditions treated or treatable with an antihypertensive agent; diseases and disorders characterized in part by any one or more of hypertension, hyperlipidemia, hypercholesterolemia (e.g., elevated cholesterol in low-density lipoprotein (LDL-C)), hyperglycemia, and/or hyperinsulinemia; and, diseases, disorders or conditions characterized in whole or in part by excess copper and/or copper-related tissue damage, and elevated blood pressure.
  • hyperlipidemia including essential
  • Hypertension another name for high blood pressure, is a dangerous condition where blood pressure is persistently higher than normal. Hypertension occurs when the pressure inside of the arteries is too high. Because it is a silent disorder, the only way to detect hypertension is to measure blood pressure. Hypertension is a common problem that affects about 50 million people in the United States alone. It is more common as people grow older and is both more common and more serious in African Americans.
  • Secondary hypertension refers to hypertension caused by another disorder. This may include, for example, adrenal gland tumors, Gushing' s syndrome, kidney disorders (including glomerulonephritis, renal vascular obstruction or narrowing, and renal failure), use of medications, drugs, or other chemicals, oral contraceptives, hemolytic-uremic syndrome, Henoch-Schonlein purpura, periarteritis nodosa, radiation enteritis, retroperitoneal fibrosis, Wilms' tumor, and other disorders.
  • WHO World Health Organization
  • ISH International Society for Hypertension
  • the 1999 WHO/ISH guidelines classify blood pressures as follows: (1) optimal blood pressure, ⁇ 120 mm Hg systolic and ⁇ 80 mm Hg diastolic; (2) normal blood pressure, ⁇ 130 mm Hg systolic and ⁇ 85 mm Hg diastolic; (3) high-normal blood pressure, 130-139 mm Hg systolic and 85-89 mm Hg diastolic; (4) grade 1 hypertension (mild), 140-159 mm Hg systolic and 90-99 mm Hg diastolic; (5) grade 2 hypertension (moderate), 150-179 mm Hg systolic and 100-109 mm Hg diastolic; (6) grade 3 hypertension (mild), >180 mm Hg systolic and >110 mm Hg diastolic; and (7) isolated systolic hypertension, >140 mm Hg systolic and ⁇ 90 mm
  • hypertensive heart disease including congestive heart failure, ischemic heart disease, and hypertrophic cardiomyopathy
  • heart attacks blood vessel damage (arteriosclerosis), aortic dissection (bleeding into and along the wall of the aorta), kidney damage, kidney failure, stroke, brain damage, and loss of vision.
  • treatment may occur at home with supervision by a health care provider, or may occur in the hospital.
  • Medications may include diuretics, ⁇ r selective adrenergic antagonists (sometimes referred to as “beta-blockers”), calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-converting enzyme (“ACE") inhibitors, angiotensin II receptor antagonists (sometimes referred to as “angiotensin receptor blockers” or “ARBs”), or alpha- 1 receptor blockers (sometimes referred to as “alpha-blockers”).
  • ACE angiotensin-converting enzyme
  • ARBs angiotensin II receptor antagonists
  • alpha- 1 receptor blockers sometimes referred to as "alpha-blockers”
  • Vasodilator medications such as hydralazine, minoxidil, diazoxide, or nitropmsside may be required if the blood pressure is very high.
  • Diuretics sometimes called “water pills,” flush water and salt out through the urine.
  • Diuretics are often the first high blood pressure medications prescribed and include, for example, thiazides such as chlorthalidone, furosemide, hydrochlorothiazide, and spironolactone, ⁇ pselective adrenergic antagonists target receptors in the heart and blood vessels, making the heart pump at a slower rate and with less force.
  • Beta- blockers include acebutolol, arvedilol, atenolol, betaxolol, bisoprolol, bopindolol, bucindolol, carteolol, carvedilol, celiprolol, esmolol, labetalol, levobunolol, medroxalol, metipranolol, metoprolol, nadolol, nebivolol, oxprenolol, penbutolol, pindolol, propafenone, propranolol, sotalol, and timolol maleate.
  • Calcium channel blockers help control the flow of calcium into cells, which helps the heart and blood vessels to relax.
  • Calcium channel blockers include, for example, nisoldipine, verapamil, diltiazem, nifedipine, nimodipine, felodipine, nicardipine, isradipine, amlodipine, and bepridil.
  • Angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) inhibitors prevent the formation of angiotensin II, the hormone that causes blood vessels to contract. ACE inhibitors cause the blood vessels to relax thereby lowering blood pressure.
  • ACE angiotensin converting enzyme
  • ACE inhibitors include, for example, captopriol, fentiapi ⁇ l, pivalopril, zofenopril, alacepril, enalapril, enalaprilat, enalaprilo, lisinopril, benazepril, quinapril, and moexipril.
  • Angiotensin II receptor antagonists include, for example, losartan, candesartan, irbesartan, valsartan, telmisartan, eprosartan, and olmesartan medoxomil.
  • Alpha- 1 receptor blockers control nerve impulses, allowing blood vessels to relax and blood to flow without encountering as much pressure.
  • angiotensin receptor blockers block the blood vessels from angiotensin II.
  • Alpha- 1 receptor blockers include, for example, doxazosin, terazosin, and prazosin.
  • Vasodilators include, for example, hydralazine, Minoxidil, sodium nitroprusside, isosorbide dinitrate, and diazoxide, as well as bosentan, eporprostenol, treprostinil, and iloprost.
  • ⁇ -adrenergic receptor antagonists e.g., prazosin, terazosin, doxazosin, ketanserin, indoramin, urapidil, clonideine, guanabenz, guanfacine, guanadrel, reserpine, and metyrosine
  • sympatholytic agents e.g., methyldopa
  • ganglionic blocking agents e.g., mecamylamine and trimethaphan
  • endothelin receptor antagonists e.g., bosentan and sitaxsentan.
  • Diabetes mellitus is a group of metabolic disorders, associated with raised plasma glucose concentration and disturbance of glucose metabolism, which results in hyperglycemia.
  • the World Health Organization has set forth a classification scheme for diabetes mellitus that includes type 1 diabetes mellitus, type 2 diabetes mellitus, gestational diabetes, and other specific types of diabetes mellitus.
  • WHO World Health Organization
  • diabetes was the sixth leading cause of death in the United States. It is estimated that about 18 million people in the United States have diabetes, and over 5 million of these people are unaware that they have the disease.
  • the Center for Disease Control (CDC) predicts that one in three Americans bom in 2000 will develop diabetes during their lifetime.
  • the total annual economic cost of diabetes in 2002 was estimated to be $132 billion, or one out of every 10 health care dollars spent in the United States. Center for Disease Control, The Burden of Chronic Diseases and Their Risk Factors (2004). The number of people with diabetes worldwide continues to increase at alarming rates. In 1985, it was estimated that 30 million people had diabetes. In 2000 the number was increased to 171 million.
  • microvascular complications are said to affect the retina, kidney and nerves
  • macrovascular complications are said to include diseases of the large vessels supplying the legs (lower extremity arterial disease), and predominantly the coronary, cerebrovascular and peripheral arterial circulation.
  • Chronic hyperglycemia of diabetes is associated with long-term damage, dysfunction, and failure of various organs, especially the eyes, kidneys, nerves, heart, and blood vessels and long-term complications of diabetes include retinopathy with potential loss of vision; nephropathy leading to renal failure; peripheral neuropathy with risk of foot ulcers, amputation, and Charcot joints; and autonomic neuropathy causing gastrointestinal, genitourinary, and cardiovascular symptoms and sexual dysfunction.
  • Insulin resistance is a common factor in leading to hyperglycemia in type 2 diabetes. It has also been reported that impaired glucose tolerance carries an increased cardiovascular risk despite minimal hyperglycemia. Fuller JH, et ah, Lancet 1:1373-1376 (1980). In the absence of diabetes, insulin resistance is reportedly a major risk factor for CAD. Lempiainen P, et ah, Circulation 100:123-128 (1999). Insulin resistance coupled with compensatory hyperinsulinemia leads to a number of proatherogenic abnormalities referred to as Insulin Resistance Syndrome. Insulin Resistance Syndrome (or Syndrome X) is a constellation of metabolic disturbances, which enhance cardiovascular risk.
  • Syndrome characteristics include deposition of fat around the abdominal organs, called visceral or central adiposity; changes in the lipoprotein profile, such as decrease in HDL, a rise in triglycerides; and, increased LDL.
  • An increase in blood pressure is seen in many, but not all, 5 insulin resistant populations.
  • Increased fibrinogen, a clotting and inflammatory marker, and PAI-I are also reported.
  • Heart disease is the leading cause of death for both women and men in the United States. In 2001, 700,142 people died of heart disease (52% of them women), accounting for 29% of all U.S. deaths. The age-adjusted death rate was 246 per
  • heart disease cost the United States $193.8 billion in total health care costs.
  • the burden of heart disease could be ameliorated by reducing the prevalence rates of its major risk factors: high blood pressure, high blood cholesterol, tobacco use, diabetes, physical inactivity, and poor nutrition. Modest reductions in the rates of one or more of these risk factors can have a large
  • Metal ions are essential for cells, but can become toxic at higher concentrations, and free metal ions have been implicated in heart disease. Metal ions replace other essential metals in enzymes or molecules, which can disrupt their function. Metal 0 ions such as Hg + and Cu+ are reactive to thiol groups and may interfere with protein structure and function. Redox active transition metals such as Fe2+/3+ and Cu+/2+, which can take up or give off an electron, may give rise to free radicals which can cause oxidative stress. Jones et ah, Biochim. Biophys. Acta 286: 652-655 (1991); Li and Trash, Carcinogenes l: 1303-1311 (1993).
  • Wilson's disease is due to a defect in copper excretion into the bile by the liver. Also known as hepatolenticular degeneration, Wilson's disease occurs in individuals who have inherited an autosomal recessive defect that leads to an accumulation of copper in excess of metabolic requirements. The excess copper is deposited in several organs and tissues, and eventually produces pathological effects primarily in the liver, where damage progresses to postnecrotic cirrhosis, and in the brain, where degeneration is widespread. Copper is also deposited as characteristic, asymptomatic, golden-brown Kayser-Fleisher rings in the corneas of all patients with cerebral symptomatology and some patients who are either asymptomatic or manifest only hepatic symptomatology. Wilson's disease generally affects patients between the ages of 10 and 40 years.
  • Wilson's disease is generally treated with an orally administered copper chelator.
  • First line therapy for treatment of Wilson's disease is penicillamine, a chelating agent.
  • Penicillamine, 3-mercapto-D-valine is also used to reduce cystine excretion in cystinuria and to treat patients with severe, active rheumatoid arthritis unresponsive to conventional therapy. It is a white or practically white, crystalline powder, freely soluble in water, slightly soluble in alcohol, and insoluble in ether, acetone, benzene, and carbon tetrachloride. Although its configuration is D 1 it is levorotatory as usually measured.
  • the empirical formula is CsH 11 NO 2 S, giving it a molecular weight of 149.21.
  • Cuprimine ® Penicillamine capsules for oral administration contain either 125 mg or 250 mg of penicillamine, as well as D & C Yellow 10, gelatin, lactose, magnesium stearate, and titanium dioxide as inactive ingredients. The 125 mg capsule also contains iron oxide for capsule color.
  • Trientine a chelating compound for removal of excess copper from the body, is prescribed for Wilson's disease patients who cannot tolerate penicillamine.
  • Trientine hydrochloride is N,N-bis(2-aminoethyl)-l,2-ethanediamine dihydrochloride.
  • Zinc acetate has not shown any long-term or major side effects in patients and can be used, long-term, in place of non-tolerable chelating agents. This is useful for patients who develop adverse reactions to chelating agents.
  • U.S. Patent Nos. 6,610,693, 6,348,465 and 6,897,243 provide copper chelators and other agents (e.g., zinc which prevents copper absorption) to decrease copper values for the benefit of subjects suffering from diabetes and its complications.
  • Hypertension is estimated to cause 4.5% of current global disease burden and is as prevalent in many developing countries, as in the developed world. Blood pressure- induced cardiovascular risk rises continuously across the whole blood pressure range. countries vary widely in capacity for management of hypertension, but worldwide the majority of diagnosed hypertensives are inadequately controlled. It was reported that, since publication of the WHO/ISH Guidelines for the Management of Hypertension in 1999, more evidence has become available to support a systolic blood pressure threshold of 140 mmHg for even "low-risk" patients. In high-risk patients there is evidence for lower thresholds. Lifestyle modification is recommended for all individuals. There is evidence that specific agents have benefits for patients with particular compelling indications, and that monotherapy is inadequate for the majority of patients.
  • beta blockers including selective beta blockers such as tenormin and lopressor, and nonselective beta blockers such as inderal and corgard
  • side effects of beta blockers include sleep disturbance, fatigue, cold extremities, paresthesia, bronchospasm with beta 2 blockers or large doses of betal blockers, depressed mood, and sexual dysfunction.
  • Side effects of calcium channel blockers include headache, dizziness, edema, constipation, bradycardia, orthostatic hypotension, and reflex tachycardia.
  • ACE inhibitors include captopril, enalapril, and lisinopril
  • hyperkalemia cough, chest pain, palpation, tachycardia, hypotension, neutropenia, and agranulocytosis.
  • side effects of angiotensin receptor blockers include dizziness with first dose, headache, back pain, diarrhea, fatigue, and nasal congestion.
  • Side effects of alpha agonists include dizziness, drowsiness, orthostatic hypotension, and severe rebound hypertension from abruptly stopping medication.
  • alpha- 1 blockers including doxazosin, terazosin, and prazosin
  • side effects of direct vasodilating agents, such as nitroprusside include headache, edema, rebound hypertension, abdominal pain, and cyanide toxicity.
  • Compositions and methods of the invention that employ antihypertensive agents in combination with copper antagonist agents, for example, copper (II) antagonists are disclosed and claimed. These combinations also, for example, allow the use of lower doses of each agent than previously required to achieve desired therapeutic goals.
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions comprising (a) a therapeutically effect amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, for example, an acid addition salt, or prodrug, thereof; (b) a therapeutically effect amount of an antihypertensive agent or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, for example, an acid addition salt; and, (c) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • Suitable copper antagonists include pharmaceutically acceptable copper chelators.
  • Copper antagonists may be present in the compositions of the invention in an amount, for example, that is effective to (1) increase copper output in the urine of said subject, (2) decrease body and/or tissue copper levels, (3) decrease copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract, (4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (6) decrease homocysteine, (7) decrease oxidative stress and/or (8) increase copper (I).
  • Copper antagonists useful in the invention include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II herein.
  • Other suitable copper antagonists include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable linear or branched tetramines capable of binding copper; 2,3,2 tetramine and salts thereof; 2,2,2 tetramine (also referred to as trientine) and salts thereof; 3,3,3 tetramine and salts thereof; triethylenetetramine hydrochloride salts, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride and triethylenetetramine tetrahydrochloride; triethylenetetramine succinate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine disuccinate; triethylenetetramine maleate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetramaleate and triethylenetetramine tetramaleate dihydrate; and triethylenetetramine fumarate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate and triethylene
  • suitable copper antagonist salts include a salt of a compound of Formula I (a) and a pharmaceutically acceptable dicarboxylic organic acid or tricarboxylic organic acid.
  • Suitable dicarboxylic organic acids include aliphatic dicarboxylic acids.
  • Such dicarboxylic acids include an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid of the formula HOOC-Q 1 -COOH wherein Q 1 is alkylene of 1 to about 8 carbon atoms or alkenylene of 2 to about 8 carbon atoms and includes both straight chain and branched chain alkylene and alkenylene groups.
  • dicarboxylic organic acids and tricarboxylic organic acids include oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, suberic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, citraconic acid, mesoconic acid, itaconic acid, tricarballytic acid, 1, 2, 3-butanetricarboxylic acid, trimesic acid, hemimellitic acid, and trimellitic acid. Certain salts are described in Provisional US Patent Application No. 60/772,451 filed February 9, 2006, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • Suitable copper antagonists include, for example, crystalline triethylenetetramine and salts thereof. These include crystalline triethylenetetramine maleate (e.g., triethylenetetramine tetramaleate and triethylenetetramine tetramaleate dihydrate), crystalline triethylenetetramine fumarate (e.g., triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate and triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate tetrahydrate), and crystalline triethylenetetramine succinate (e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate anhydrate).
  • Other agents capable of reducing copper include thiomolybdates (including mono-
  • Copper antagonists useful in the invention also include copper antagonizing metabolites, such as copper antagonizing metabolites of trientine including, for example, N-acetyl trientine, and analogues, derivatives, and prodrugs thereof. Copper antagonists useful in the invention also include modified copper antagonists, for example, modified trientines. Derivatives of copper antagonists, including trientine or trientine salts or analogues, include those modified with polyethylene glycol (PEG).
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Copper antagonists useful in the invention also include copper antagonists, including copper chelators, which have been pre-complexed with a non-copper metal ion prior to administration for therapy, the non-copper metal ion having a binding affinity for the copper antagonist that is lower that that of copper (e.g., lower than that of Cu 2+ ). Also encompassed are metal complexes comprising copper antagonists and non- copper metals (that have lower binding affinities than copper for the copper antagonist) and one or more additional ligands than typically found in complexes of that metal. These include, for example, pentacoordinate copper complexes of triethylenetetramine and another ligand.
  • Suitable antihypertensive agents are those that lower blood pressure and include, for example, diuretics (including hydrochloride and chlorthalidone), ⁇ -adrenergic receptor antagonists (including prazosin, terazosin, doxazosin, ketanserin, indoramin, urapidil, clonideine, guanabenz, guanfacine, guanadrel, reseipine, and metyrosine), ⁇ i-selective adrenergic antagonist (including metoprolol, atenolol, esmolol, acebutolol, bopindolol, carteolol, oxprenolol, penbutolol, medroxalol, bucindolol, levobunolol, metipranolol, bisoprolol, nebivolol, betaxolol,
  • antihypertensive agents include sympatholytic agents (e.g., methyldopa), ganglionic blocking agents (including mecamylamine and trimethaphan), and endothelin receptor antagonists (including bosentan and sitaxsentan).
  • sympatholytic agents e.g., methyldopa
  • ganglionic blocking agents including mecamylamine and trimethaphan
  • endothelin receptor antagonists including bosentan and sitaxsentan.
  • Suitable copper antagonist salts include acid addition salts such as, for example, those of suitable inorganic or organic acids.
  • suitable organic acids include succinic acid, maleic acid, and fumaric acid.
  • Suitable inorganic acids include hydrochloric acid.
  • Hydrochloride and succinate salts are presently preferred. Triethylenetetramine disuccinate is presently most preferred.
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions, including tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of an antihypertensive agent and one or more compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II herein.
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions, including tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of an antihypertensive agent and one or more linear or branched tetramines capable of binding copper. Examples of tetramines include 2,3,2 tetramine, 2,2,2 tetramine, and 3,3,3 tetramine, and salts thereof.
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions, including tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of an antihypertensive agent and triethylenetetramine or a triethylenetetramine salt(s).
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions, including tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of an antihypertensive agent and one or more triethylenetetramine hydrochloride salts, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride and triethylenetetramine tetrahydrochloride.
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions, including tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of an antihypertensive agent and one or more triethylenetetramine succinate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine disuccinate.
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions, including tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of an antihypertensive agent and one or more triethylenetetramine maleate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetramaleate and triethylenetetramine tetramaleate dihydrate; or triethylenetetramine fumarate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate and triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate tetrahydrate.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of an antihypertensive agent and one or more triethylenetetramine maleate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetramaleate and triethylenetetramine tetramaleate dihydrate; or triethylenetetramine fumarate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate and triethylenetetramine tetraf
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions, including tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations, comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and therapeutically effective amounts of a copper antagonist and antihypertensive agent, for example, an antihypertensive agent.
  • Antihypertensive agents include, for example, diuretics, beta-blockers, calcium channel blockers, ACE inhibitors, angiotensin receptor blockers and alpha-blockers, and vasodilators, among others.
  • Other antihypertensive agents include sympatholytic agents, ganglionic blocking agents, and endothelin receptor antagonists.
  • the invention also relates to methods of using such compositions to treat subjects suffering from or at risk for various diseases, disorders, and conditions, including pre-hypertension, hypertension (including essential hypertension and grades 1, 2 and 3 hypertension) and related cardiovascular diseases; secondary hypertension; malignant hypertension; isolated systolic hypertension; atherosclerosis; coronary heart disease; impaired glucose tolerance; impaired fasting glucose; diabetes, including type 1 and type 2 diabetes, and their complications; insulin resistance; Syndrome X; obesity and other weight related disorders; cardiomyopathy, including diabetic cardiomyopathy; diseases and disorders characterized in part by any one or more of hypertension, hyperlipidemia, hypercholesterolemia (e.g., elevated cholesterol in low-density lipoprotein (LDL- C)), hyperglycemia, and/or hyperinsulinemia; and, characterized in whole or in part by (a) hypercupremia and/or copper-related tissue damage and (b) hypertension, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, impaired fasting glucose and/or elevated or undesired blood pressure, or pre
  • the invention includes methods for treating a subject having or suspected of having or predisposed to, or at risk for, for example, any diseases, disorders and/or conditions characterized in whole or in part, for example, by (a) hypercupremia and/or copper-related tissue damage and (b) hypertension, comprising administering a composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and an antihypertensive agent.
  • diseases, disorders and/or conditions include but are not limited to those described or referenced herein.
  • Such compounds may be administered in amounts, for example, that are effective to (1) decrease body and/or tissue copper levels, (2) increase copper output in the urine of said subject, (3) decrease copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract, (4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (5) decrease homocysteine, (6) decrease oxidative stress (7) increase copper (I) and/or (8) lower blood pressure.
  • Such compositions include, for example, tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations.
  • the invention includes methods for regulating blood pressure and diminishing copper and/or available copper in a subject having or suspected of having or predisposed to diseases, disorders and/or conditions characterized in whole or in part by (a) hypercupremia and/or copper- related tissue damage and (b) hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, impaired fasting glucose and/or elevated or undesired blood pressure, comprising administering a composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and an antihypertensive agent.
  • diseases, disorders and/or conditions include but are not limited to those described or referenced herein.
  • Such diseases, disorders and conditions include, but are not limited to, those herein disclosed herein.
  • Such compounds may be administered in amounts, for example, that are effective to (1) decrease body and/or tissue copper levels, (2) increase copper output in the urine of said subject, (3) decrease copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract, (4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (5) decrease homocysteine, (6) decrease oxidative stress (7) increase copper (I), and/or (8) lower blood pressure.
  • Such compositions include, for example, tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations.
  • the invention includes methods for administering a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and an antihypertensive agent formulated in a delayed release preparation, a slow release preparation, an extended release preparation, a controlled release preparation, and/or in a repeat action preparation to a subject having or suspected of having or predisposed to diseases, disorders and/or conditions characterized in whole or in part by (a) hypercupremia and/or copper-related tissue damage and (b) hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, impaired fasting glucose, and/or elevated or undesired blood pressure, comprising administering a composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and an antihypertensive agent.
  • diseases, disorders and conditions include, but are not limited to, those disclosed herein.
  • Such compounds may be administered in amounts, for example, that are effective to (1) decrease body and/or tissue copper levels, (2) increase copper output in the urine of said subject, (3) decrease copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract, (4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (5) decrease homocysteine, (6) decrease oxidative stress (7) increase copper (I), and/or (8) lower blood pressure.
  • Such compositions include, for example, tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations.
  • the invention includes methods for the use of therapeutically effective amounts of a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent in the manufacture of a medicament.
  • Such medicaments include, for example, tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations.
  • Such medicaments include those for the treatment of a subject as disclosed herein.
  • the invention includes methods for the use of a therapeutically effective amount of a copper antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent in the manufacture of a dosage form.
  • dosage forms include, for example, tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations.
  • dosage forms include those for the treatment of a subj ect as disclosed herein.
  • the invention includes transdermal patches, pads, wraps, and bandages capable of being adhered or otherwise associated with the skin of a subject, said articles being capable of delivering a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent to a subject.
  • the invention includes an article of manufacture comprising a vessel containing a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent and instructions for use, including use for the treatment of a subject.
  • the invention includes an article of manufacture comprising packaging material containing one or more dosage forms containing a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent, wherein the packaging material has a label that indicates that the dosage form can be used for a subject having or suspected of having or predisposed to any of the diseases, disorders and/or conditions described or referenced herein, including diseases, disorders and/or conditions characterized in whole or in part by elevated or undesired blood pressure and/or hypercupremia, including but not limited to those herein disclosed herein.
  • dosage forms include, for example, tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations.
  • the invention includes a formulation comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent in amounts effective to remove copper from the body of a subject and reduce elevated or undesired blood pressure in the subject.
  • formulations include, for example, tablets and capsules and other oral delivery forms and formulations.
  • the invention includes devices containing therapeutically effective amounts of a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and a pharmaceutically acceptable antihypertensive agent, for example, a rate-controlling membrane enclosing a drug reservoir and a monolithic matrix device. These devices may be employed for the treatment of subjects in need thereof as disclosed herein.
  • a "copper antagonist” is a pharmaceutically acceptable compound that binds or chelates copper, preferably copper (II), in vivo for removal. Copper chelators are presently preferred copper antagonists. Copper (II) chelators, and copper (II) specific chelators (i.e., those that preferentially bind copper (II) over other forms of copper such as copper (I)), are especially preferred.
  • Copper (II) refers to the oxidized (or +2) form of copper, also sometimes referred to as Cu + ".
  • a disorder is any disorder, disease, or condition that would benefit from an agent that reduces local or systemic copper, extracellular copper, bound copper, or copper concentrations, and/or an agent that reduces blood pressure, for example.
  • agents that reduce extracellular copper or extracellular copper concentrations (local or systemic) and, more particularly, agents that reduce extracellular copper (II) or extracellular copper (II) concentrations are particularly preferred.
  • disorders include, but are not limited to, those described and/or referenced herein, and include diseases, disorders and conditions include that would benefit from (1) a decrease body and/or tissue copper levels, (2) an increase copper output in the urine of said subject, (3) a decrease copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract, (4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (5) decrease homocysteine, (6) decrease oxidative stress (7) increase copper (I), and/or (8) lower blood pressure.
  • antihypertensive agent refers to pharmaceutically acceptable therapeutic compounds capable lowering blood pressure.
  • Antihypertensive agents include for example, diuretics, beta-blockers, calcium channel blockers, ACE inhibitors, angiotensin receptor blockers and alpha-blockers, and vasodilators, among others.
  • Other antihypertensive agents include sympatholytic agents, ganglionic blocking agents, and endothelin receptor antagonists.
  • Hypertension refers, in general, using the standards of today, systolic blood pressure that is consistently over 140 and/or diastolic blood pressure that is consistently over 90. Either or both of these numbers may be too high.
  • Pre-hypertension refers, in general, using the standards of today, systolic blood pressure between 120 and 139 and/or diastolic blood pressure between 90 and 99 on multiple readings. Subjects with pre-hypertension are likely to develop high blood pressure at some point.
  • mammal refers to any animal classified as a mammal, including humans, domestic and farm animals, and zoo, sports, or pet animals, such as dogs, horses, cats, sheep, pigs, cows, etc. The preferred mammal herein is a human.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refers to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic bases or acids including inorganic or organic bases and inorganic or organic acids the like.
  • salts may be prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic acids, including inorganic and organic acids.
  • Organic acids include both aliphatic and aromatic carboxylic acids and include, for example, aliphatic monocarboxylic acids, aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aliphatic tricarboxylic acids, aromatic monocarboxylic acids, aromatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic tricarboxylic acids and other organic acids known to those of skill in the art.
  • Aliphatic carboxylic acids may be saturated or unsaturated. Suitable aliphatic carboxylic acids include those having from 2 to about 10 carbon atoms.
  • Aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include saturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids and unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids.
  • saturated monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propronic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, pelargonic acid, and caprynic acid.
  • unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acrylic acid, propiolic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid and isocrotonic acid.
  • Aliphatic dicarboxylic acids include saturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids and unsaturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids.
  • saturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids examples include oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, suberic acid, azelaic acid, and sebacic acid.
  • unsaturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids include maleic acid, fumaric acid, citraconic acid, mesaconic acid, itaconic acid and the like.
  • Aliphatic tricarboxylic acids includes saturated aliphatic tricarboxylic acids and unsaturated tricarboxylic acids. Examples of saturated tricarboxylic acids include tricarballylic acid, 1, 2, 3-butanetricarboxylic acid and the like.
  • Suitable aliphatic dicarboxylic acids include those of the formula: HOOC-Q 1 -COOH, wherein Q 1 is alkylene of 1 to about 8 carbon atoms or alkenylene of 2 to about 8 atoms, and includes both straight chain and branched chain alkylene and alkenylene groups.
  • aromatic dicarboxylic acids include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid and the like.
  • aromatic tricarboxylic acids include trimesic acid, hemimellitic acid and trimellitic acid.
  • Such acids may also include, for example, acetic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, citric, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glutamic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, isethionic, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic, nitric, pamoic, pantothenic, phosphoric, succinic, sulfuric, tartaric, p-toluenesulfonic acid, and the like.
  • Particularly preferred are hydrochloric, maleic, fumaric and succinic acid copper antagonist salts.
  • Succinic acid copper antagonist salts are most preferred, particularly for those copper antagonist salts that are not anhydrous.
  • preventing means preventing in whole or in part, or ameliorating or controlling.
  • a "therapeutically effective amount" in reference to the compounds or compositions of the instant invention refers to the amount sufficient to induce a desired biological, pharmaceutical, or therapeutic result. That result can be alleviation of the signs, symptoms, or causes of a disease or disorder or condition, or any other desired alteration of a biological system. In the present invention, the result will involve the prevention, decrease, or reversal of tissue injury, in whole or in part, and reduced blood pressure, as referenced herein.
  • Therapeutic effects include, for example, (1) decreasing body and/or tissue copper levels, (2) increasing copper output in the urine, (3) decreasing copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract, (4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (5) decrease homocysteine, (6) decrease oxidative stress (7) increase copper (I), and/or (8) lowering blood pressure.
  • the term "treating" refers to both therapeutic treatment and prophylactic or preventative measures. Those in need of treatment include those already with the disorder as well as those prone to having the disorder or diagnosed with the disorder or those in which the disorder is to be prevented.
  • a reduction in copper, particularly extracellular copper that is generally in the its copper II form, will be advantageous in the treatment of disorders, diseases, and/or conditions, caused or exacerbated by mechanisms that may be affected by or are dependent on excess copper values and/or hyperglycemia.
  • a reduction in copper and/or blood pressure will be advantageous in providing a combined reduction in and/or reversal of copper- associated and/or blood pressure- associated damage.
  • Copper antagonist / antihypertensive agent compositions may be prepared for administration via oral delivery.
  • the preparation of various tablets and capsules are described in Examples 1-72, which refer to compositions comprising a copper antagonist(s) and ⁇ rselective adrenergic antagonist(s), ACE inhibitor(s), calcium channel blocker(s), angiotensin-II receptor antagonist(s), alpha adrenergic receptor antagonist(s), and vasodilators.
  • tablets include tablets (see, e.g., Examples 1, 13, 25, 37, 49 and 61), tablets with a filler(s) (see, e.g., Examples 2, 14, 26, 38, 50 and 62), tablets with a desiccant(s) (see, e.g., Examples 3, 15, 27, 39, 51 and 63), tablets with a wet granulations binder(s) (see, e.g., Examples 4, 16, 28, 40, 52 and 64), tablets with a wet granulations binder(s) and a desiccant(s) (see, e.g., Examples 5, 17, 29, 41, 53 and 65), capsules (see, e.g., Examples 6, 18, 30, 42, 54 and 66), capsules with a desiccant(s) (see, e.g., Examples 7, 19, 31, 43, 55 and 67), capsules with a filler(s) (see, e.g., Examples 8, 20, 32, 44, 56 and 68), capsules with a filler(
  • Examples 1-72 relate to exemplary copper antagonist compositions comprising the ⁇ i-selective adrenergic antagonist carvedilol, the ACE inhibitor enalapril, the calcium channel blocker diltiazem, the angiotensin-II receptor antagonist losartan, the alpha adrenergic receptor agonist clonidine, and the vasodilator isosorbide, but other copper antagonists, ⁇ r selective adrenergic antagonists, ACE inhibitors, calcium channel blockers, angiotensin-II receptor antagonists, alpha adrenergic receptor antagonists, vasodilators, and anti-hypertensive agents may be used and included in amounts depending on desired dose and frequency of administration, including doses lower than those presently prescribed for lowering blood pressure and reducing copper, e.g., copper (II).
  • copper (II) copper
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • ⁇ r selective adrenergic antagonists may be prepared using art-known methods.
  • metoprolol may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,927,640, 4,957,745, 5,001,161, and 5,081,154 and may be administered, for example, as metoprolol succinate or metoprolol fumarate or metoprolol tartrate as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Metoprolol may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 200 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Esmolol may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 6,528,540, and 6,310,094 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 6,310,094). Esmolol may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Betaxolol may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,252,984 and 4911920 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,252,984 and 4911920). Betaxolol may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 800 mg per dose unit, preferably 20 to about 100 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Propafenone may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Propafenone may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 3500 mg per dose unit, about 4 mg to about 1400 mg per dose unit, or about 70 mg to about 310 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Propranolol may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Propranolol may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 160 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Timolol may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,797,413, 4,386,098, 4,416,890, 4,426,388 4,861,760, 6,174,524, 5,231,095, 6,316,443, and 6,248,735 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,386,098, 4,416,890, 4,426,388, 6,248,735, and 6,316,443).
  • Timolol, for example, timolol maleate may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 100 mg per dose unit, or 1 to about 50 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Carvedilol may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,503,067 and 5,760,069 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,503,067 and 5,902,821).
  • Carvedilol may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 300 mg per dose unit, or 1 to about 50 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Angiotensin converting enzyme inhibitors may be prepared using art-known methods.
  • enalapril may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,374,829, 5,562,921, and 5,690,962, and may be administered, for example, as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,374,829 450 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005).
  • Enalapril may be administered, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, or about 2.5 mg to about 250 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Quinapril may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,344,949, 4,743,450, 4,761,479, 5,684,016 and 6,417,196 and may be administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,743,450 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005).
  • Quinapril may be administered, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.1 mg to about 150 mg per dose unit, or about 1 mg to about 80 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Moexipril may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent No. 4,344,949 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,344,949 and 6,767,556 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005). Moexipril may be administered, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 500 mg per dose unit, or about 1 mg to about 50 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Ramipril may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 5,151,433 4,587,258, 5,061,722, 5,977,380 and 6,407,262, and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,403,856 and 6,086,919 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005).
  • Ramipril may be administered, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.1 mg to about 50 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Perindopril may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4508729 and 5162362 and may be administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5162362 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005).
  • Perindopril may be administered, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 200 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Trandolapril may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,933,361 and 5,744,496 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,744,496 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005). Trandolapril may be administered, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 100 mg per dose unit, or about 1 to about 40 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Fosinopril may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,337,201, 4,384,123 and 5,006,344 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,337,201 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005). Fosinopril may be administered, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 600 mg per dose unit, or about 1 mg to about 330 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Calcium channel blockers may be prepared using art-known methods.
  • nisoldipine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,703,038 and 4,892,741 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,478,848 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005).
  • Nisoldipine may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 60 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Verapamil may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,863,742, 4,946,687, 5,030,456, 5,082,668, 5,141,752, 5,160,744, 5,190,765, 5,200,196, 5,232,705, 5,252,338 and 6,096,339 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Verapamil may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 5 g per day, or about 80 mg to about 280 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Diltiazem may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Diltiazem may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 240 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Nifedipine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,892,741 and 5,264,446 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005). Nifedipine may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 200 mg per day, or about 10 mg to about 150 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Felodipine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Felodipine may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 0.01 mg to about 100 mg per day, or about 0.5 mg to about 20 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Nicardipine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,343,789, 5,198,226, 4,758,437 and 4,880,823 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,637,930, 5,186,942, 5,198,226, and
  • Nicardipine may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 650 mg per day, or about 1 mg to about 250 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Isradipine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,816,263, 4,946,687, 4,950,486, and 5,030,456 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,816,263, 4,946,687, 4,950,486 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005).
  • Isradipine may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 2 mg to about 20 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Amlodipine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,572,909 and 4,879,303 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,572,909 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005). Amlodipine may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 2 mg to about 50 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Angiotensin II receptor antagonists may be prepared using art-known methods. For example, losartan may be prepared using methods described in U.S.
  • Patent Nos. 5,138,069, 5,153,197, 5,608,075 and 5,210,079 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,138,069 and 5,153,197 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005).
  • Losartan may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 500 mg per day, or about 1 mg to about 100 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Candesartan may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Candesartan may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 100 mg per day, or about 5 mg to about 50 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Irbesartan may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Irbesartan may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, or about 1 mg to about 500 mg per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Valsartan may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent No. 5,399,578 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 6,294,197 and 6,485,745 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005). Valsartan may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 250 mg per dose unit, or about 50 mg to about 100 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Telmisartan may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Telmisartan may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 250 mg per dose unit, or about 10 mg to about 100 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Eprosartan may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Eprosartan may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, or about 5 mg to about 250 mg per unit dose, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Olmesartan medoxomil may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent No. 5,616,599 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 5,616,599 or as described in Physician's Desk Reference, 59 th Ed. 2005). Olmesartan medoxomil may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 1000 mg per day, or about 5 mg to about 250 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Sympatholytic agents including ⁇ 2 receptor agonists may be prepared using art- known methods.
  • clonidine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,454,701, 3,454,701, 5,212,196, 5,684,156, 5,484,607 5,869,100 and 6,030,642 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 3,454,701, 3,454,701, and 4,201,211).
  • Clonidine may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.025 mg to about 10 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Guanabenz may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,591,636 and 3,658,993 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 3,658,993). Guanabenz may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.1 mg to about 70 mg per dose unit, preferably 1 mg to about 40 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Guanfacine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Guanfacine may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.01 mg to about 50 mg per dose unit, preferably 1 mg to about 10 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • ⁇ -adrenergic receptor antagonists may be prepared using art-known methods. For example, prazosin may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Prazosin may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.02 mg to about 200 mg per dose unit, preferably 0.5 mg to about 50 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Terazosin may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,026,894, 4,112,097, 4,251,532, 5,294,615 and 5,412,095 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,026,894, 4,112,097, 4,251,532, and 5,212,176).
  • Terazosin may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.01 mg to about 250 mg per dose unit, preferably 0.5 mg to about 100 mg per dose unit, preferably about 1 mg to about 20 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Doxazosin may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,188,390, 6,476,033, 6,130,218, 6,133,269, 6,140,334 and 4,758,569 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,188,390).
  • Doxazosin may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 50 mg per dose unit, preferably 1 mg to about 20 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Ketanserin is a well-known synthetic drug (The Merck Index 1 lth Ed., page 834) that may be prepared using or alternatively may be purchased in bulk from a manufacturer (e.g. A.G. Scientific Inc., San Diego, USA) and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 6,214,884).
  • Ketanserin may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 500 mg per dose unit, preferably 5 mg to about 50 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Indoramin may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Indoramin may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 200 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Urapidil may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,957,786 and 6,046,329 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 3,957,786 and 4,131,678).
  • Urapidil may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 100 mg per dose unit, preferably 20 mg to about 60 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Guanadrel may be prepared using methods know in the art (Hansson et al., Clin. Pharmac.Therap. 14:204 (1973)) and is administered as known in the art, or as disclosed in Current Pharmaceutical Design, 2:85-101 (1996). Guanadrel may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 75 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Reserpine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Reserpine may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about .01 mg to about 1 mg per dose unit, preferably 0.1 mg to about 0.6 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Metyrosine is a compound know in the art (see e.g. The Merck Index 10th Ed., 5 1983 p. 883) and may be purchased in bulk from a manufacturer and is administered as known in the art or as disclosed in Current Pharmaceutical Design, 2:85-101 (1996). Metyrosine may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 5 g per day, preferably 2 g to about 3 g per day, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and 0 capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Alfuzosin may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,661,491 and 6149940 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent No. 4,661,491). Alfuzosin may be prepared for administration, for example, in a 5 dose in the range of about 0.5 mg to about 50 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent. Ergotamine may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent Nos. 4,785,423 0 and 5,169,849 and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S.
  • Ergotamine may be prepared for administration, for example, in a dose in the range of about 0.5 mg to about 5 mg per dose unit, in an adult patient of about 70 kg body weight. Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and 5 lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Vasodilators may be prepared using art-known methods.
  • isosorbide dinitrate may be prepared using methods described in U.S. Patent No. 4,156,736, and is administered as known in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent Nos. 5,762,954, 4,293,565, 4,868,179, and 5,419,912).
  • Isosorbide dinitrate may be prepared for administration in a dose in the range of about 1 mg to about 160 mg per day.
  • Dosage forms, for example, tablets and capsules may be prepared accordingly, or using other doses as disclosed herein, and lower doses than those presently prescribed for this agent.
  • Sympatholytic agents, ganglionic blocking agents, and endothelin receptor antagonists are known and may be prepared by methods known in the art. Doses and dosing for such agents is also known in the art.
  • Copper antagonists preferably copper (II) antagonists, and more preferably copper (II) chleator agents, may be used in the invention.
  • Copper antagonists include, for example, trientine active agents, which include trientines (triethylenetetramines) .
  • Copper antagonists useful in the invention include, but are not limited to, pharmaceutically acceptable compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II herein.
  • Other suitable copper antagonists include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable linear or branched tetramines capable of binding copper; 2,3,2 tetramine and salts thereof; 2,2,2 tetramine (also referred to as trientine) and salts thereof; 3,3,3 tetramine and salts thereof; triethylenetetramine hydrochloride salts, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride and triethylenetetramine tetrahydrochloride; triethylenetetramine succinate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine disuccinate; triethylenetetramine maleate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetramaleate and triethylenetetramine tetramaleate dihydrate; and triethylenetetramine fumarate salts, for example, triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate and triethylene
  • Suitable copper antagonists include, for example, crystalline triethylenetetramine and salts thereof. These include crystalline triethylenetetramine maleate (e.g., triethylenetetramine tetramaleate and triethylenetetramine tetramaleate dihydrate), crystalline triethylenetetramine fumarate (e.g., triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate and triethylenetetramine tetrafumarate tetrahydrate), and crystalline triethylenetetramine succinate (e.g, triethylenetetramine disuccinate anhydrate).
  • Other agents capable of reducing copper include thiomolybdates (including mono-
  • Copper antagonists useful in the invention also include copper antagonizing metabolites, such as copper antagonizing metabolites of trientine including, for example, N-acetyl trientine, and analogues, derivatives, and prodrugs thereof. Copper antagonists useful in the invention also include modified copper antagonists, for example, modified trientines. Derivatives of copper antagonists, including trientine or trientine salts or analogues, include those modified with polyethylene glycol (PEG).
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • the invention includes pharmaceutical compositions comprising a therapeutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable precomplexed copper antagonist or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, for example, an acid addition salt, thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • copper antagonists useful in the invention also include copper antagonists, including copper chelators, which have been pre-complexed with a non-copper metal ion prior to administration for therapy.
  • Metal ions used for pre-complexing have a lower association constant for the copper antagonist than that of copper.
  • a metal ion for pre- complexing a copper antagonist that chelates Cu 2+ is one that has a lower binding affinity for the copper antagonist than Cu 2+ .
  • the non-copper metal ion has an association constant for triethylenetetramine that is equal to or less than about 10 "19 , more preferably less than or equal to about 10 "18 , still more preferably less than or equal to about 10 " , even more preferably less than or equal to about 10 " , 10 “10 , or 10 “9 , and most preferably less than or equal to about 10 "8 , 10 "7 or 10 "5 .
  • Preferred metal ions for precomplexing include, for example, calcium ⁇ e.g., Ca 2+ ), magnesium (e.g., Mg 2+ ), chromium (e.g., Cr 2+ and Cr 3+ ), manganese (e.g., Mn 2+ ), zinc (e.g., Zn ), and iron (e.g., Fe and Fe j.
  • Most preferred metal ions for precomplexing are calcium, zinc, and iron.
  • Other metals include, for example, cobalt (e.g., Co 2+ ), nickel (e.g., Ni 2+ ), silver (e.g., Ag 1+ ) and selenium (e.g.,
  • Non-copper metals are chosen with regard, for example, to their relative binding to the copper antagonist, the dose of the copper antagonist to be administered, and relative to potential toxicity following displacement of the non- copper metal ion.
  • active metabolites, derivatives, and prodrugs of copper antagonists can also be used for precomplexing.
  • Preferred copper antagonists for precomplexing are Cu 2+ antagonists, particularly Cu 2+ chelators.
  • Preferred Cu 2+ antagonists are linear, branched or cyclic polyamines chelators including, for example, tetramines. A preferred tetramine is triethylenetetramine.
  • precomplexed copper antagonists include precomplexed triethylenetetramines.
  • Precomplexed triethylenetetramines include, for example, triethylenetetramine (or salts thereof, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrocholoride) precomplexed with a metal ion having a binding constant lower than copper.
  • Such compounds may be referred to, for example, as "Ca-Trientine" to refer to triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium (e.g., Ca 2+ ).
  • copper antagonists include D-pencillamine, sar (N- methylglycine), diamsar (l,8-diamino-3, 6, 10, 13, 16, 19-hexa- azabicyclo[6.6.6]icosane), N-acetylpenicillamine, N,N'-diethyldithiocarbamate, bathocuproinedisulfonic acid, bathocuprinedisulfonate, and thiomolybdates, including mono-, di-, tri- and tetrathiomolybdates. Each may be precomplexed with a metal ion.
  • Precomplexed copper antagonists for example, a precomplexed triethylenetetramine
  • a precomplexed triethylenetetramine may be prepared as the precomplexed compound or a salt thereof.
  • precomplexing is believed to assist in the preparation, stability, or bioavailability of copper antagonists, including those in to be prepared and administered in aqueous formulations, such as, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrocholoride. This allows lower dosing as well.
  • Precomplexed copper antagonists may be present in the compositions of the invention in an amount, for example, that is effective to (1) increase copper output in the urine of said subject, (2) decrease body and/or tissue copper levels, (3) decrease copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract (4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (5) decrease homocysteine, (6) decrease oxidative stress and/or (7) increase copper (I).
  • metal complexes comprising copper antagonists and non- copper metals (that have lower binding affinities than copper for the copper antagonist) and one or more additional ligands than typically found in complexes of that metal.
  • additional ligands may serve to block sites of entry into the complex for water, oxygen, hydroxide, or other species that may undesirably complex with the metal ion and can cause degradation of the copper antagonist.
  • copper complexes of triethylenetetramine have been found to form pentacoordinate complexes with a tetracoordinated triethylenetetramine and a chloride ligand when crystallized from a salt solution rather than a tetracoordinate Cu 2+ triethylenetetramine complex.
  • 219 mg of triethylenetetramine * 2 HCl were dissolved in 50 ml, and 170 mg Of CuCl 2 * 2H2O were dissolved in 25 ml ethanol (95%).
  • [Cu(triethylenetetramine)Cl] complex may be formed from or between copper antagonists, for example, copper chelators (such as Cu2+ chelators, spermadine, spermine, tetracyclam, etc.), particularly those subject to degradative pathways such as those noted above, by providing additional complexing agents (such as anions in solution, for example, I “ , Br “ , F ' , (SO 4 ) 2" ,
  • Trientine active agents may be prepared in a number of ways.
  • Trientine is a strongly basic moiety with multiple nitrogens that can be converted into a large number of suitable associated acid addition salts using an acid, for example, by reaction of stoichiometrically equivalent amounts of trientine and of the acid in an inert solvent such as ethanol or water and subsequent evaporation if the dosage form is best formulated from a dry salt. Possible acids for this reaction are in particular those that yield physiologically acceptable salts.
  • Nitrogen-containing copper antagonists for example, trientine active agents such as, for example, trientine, that can be delivered as a salt(s) (such as acid addition salts, e.g., trientine dihydrochloride) act as copper-chelating agents or antagonists, which aids the elimination of copper from the body by forming a stable soluble complex that is readily excreted by the kidney.
  • trientine active agents such as, for example, trientine
  • inorganic acids can be used, e.g., sulfuric acid, nitric acid, hydrohalic acids such as hydrochloric acid or hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acids such as orthophosphoric acid, sulfamic acid. This is not an exhaustive list.
  • organic acids can be used to prepare suitable salt forms, in particular aliphatic, alicyclic, araliphatic, aromatic or heterocyclic mono-or polybasic carboxylic, sulfonic or sulfuric acids, (e.g., formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, citric acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, nicotinic acid, isonicotinic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, ethanedisulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenemono-and-disulfonic acids, and laurylsulfuric acid).
  • Nitrogen-containing copper antagonists for example, trientine active agents such as, for example, trientine, can also be in the form of quaternary ammonium salts in which the nitrogen atom carries a suitable organic group such as an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aralkyl moiety.
  • nitrogen-containing copper antagonists are in the form of a compound or buffered in solution and/or suspension to a near neutral pH much lower than the pH 14 of a solution of trientine itself.
  • trientine active agents include derivative trientines, for example, trientine in combination with picolinic acid (2-pyridinecarboxylic acid). These derivatives include, for example, trientine picolinate and salts of trientine picolinate, for example, trientine picolinate HCl. They also include, for example, trientine di- picolinate and salts of trientine di-picolinate, for example, trientine di-picolinate HCl.
  • Picolinic acid moieties may be attached to trientine, for example one or more of the CH 2 moieties, using chemical techniques known in the art. Those in the art will be able to prepare other suitable derivatives, for example, trientine-PEG derivatives, which may be useful for particular dosage forms including oral dosage forms having increased bioavailability.
  • Compounds suitable as copper antagonists include cyclic and acyclic compounds according to Formula I:
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are independently selected from the group consisting of N, S and O;
  • R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from the group consisting of H, C 1 to C 10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3 to ClO cycloalkyl, Cl to C6 alkyl C3 to ClO cycloalkyl, anyl, anyl substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, heteroaryl, fused aryl, Cl to C6 alkyl aryl, Cl to C6 alkyl aryl substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, Cl to C5 alkyl heteroaryl, Cl to C6 alkyl fused aryl, -CH 2 COOH,
  • nl, n2 and n3 are independently 2 or 3 and each of R 71 R 8 R 9 R 10 R 11 and R 12 is independently selected and is selected from the group consisting of H, Cl to ClO straight chain or branched alkyl, C3 to ClO cycloalkyl, Cl to C6 alkyl, C3 to ClO cycloalkyl, aryl, aryl substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, heteroaryl fused aryl, Cl to C6 alkyl aryl, Cl to C6 alkyl aryl substituted with 1 to 5 substituents, Cl to C5 alkyl heteroaryl, Cl to C6 fused aryl, provided that when X 1 is S or O, then R 2 is absent; when X 2 is S or O, then R 3 is absent, when X 3 is S or O, then R 4 is absent and when X
  • R 1, R 2, R 3, R 41 R 5 and R 6 may be functionalized for attachment to groups which include, but are not limited to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • groups which include, but are not limited to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include, but are not limited to, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl to ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 and R 12 may be functionalized for attachment to groups which include, but are not limited to, peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • groups which include, but are not limited to, peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include, but are not limited to, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-S-peptide and Cl to ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 1, R 2, R 3, R 41 R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from H, Cl to C6 alkyl, -CH 2 COOH, -CH 2 SO 3 H, -CH 2 PO(OH) 2 and -CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); and each R 7, R 8, R 9, Ri 0, R 11 and R 12 is independently selected from H and Cl to C6 alkyl.
  • suitable compounds include those wherein at least one of R 1 and R 2 and at least one of R 5 and R 6 is H or Cl to C6 alkyl.
  • R 3 and R 4 are selected from H or Cl to C6 alkyl; more particularly, R 1; R 2, R 5, and R 6 are selected from H or Cl to C6 alkyl.
  • R 1; R 2, R 5, and R 6 are selected from H or Cl to C6 alkyl.
  • suitable compounds include those wherein X 2 and X 3 are N and nl, n2 and n3 are 2, or nl and n3 are 2 and n2 is 3.
  • R 11 and R 12 are independently selected from H and Cl to C3 alkyl.
  • all of X 1, X 2, X 3) and X 4 are suitably N or, alternatively, one of X 1 and X 4 is S and X 2 and X 3 are N or S.
  • Tetra-heteroatom acyclic compounds within Formula I are provided where X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O, such that, (a) for a four-nitrogen series, i.e., when X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are N then: R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- ⁇ rotein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 6 does not exist;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , Rn, or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 4 does not exist and R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 6 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R ⁇ , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-
  • R 1 and R 6 do not exist;
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3- ClO cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH);
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 1O , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein. (e) for a second two-nitrogen series, i.e., when X 1 and X 3 are N and X 2 and X 4 are
  • R 3 and R 6 do not exist;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 4 and R 6 do not exist;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl- S -peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 3 and R 4 do not exist;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 5 and R 6 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH 5 CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); n
  • Rj, R 2 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 1O , Rn, or Rj 2 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S- ⁇ rotein.
  • R 1 and R 2 and one ofR 5 and R 6 are joined together to form the bridging group (CR 13 R 14 ) J14
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O such that, (a) for a four-nitrogen series, i.e., when X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are N then:
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl,
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 5 does not exist;
  • R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); nl,
  • R 2 , R 3 or R 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half-lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S- ⁇ rotein.
  • R 2 and R 5 do not exist;
  • R 3 and R 4 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); nl, n2, n3,
  • R 3 , or R 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half-lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , Rs, R 9 , Rio, Rn, Ri 2? R 13 or Ri 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 3 and R 5 do not exist;
  • R 2 and R 4 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); nl, n2, n3,
  • R 2 , or R 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half-lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl- CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S- ⁇ rotein.
  • R 3 , R 4 and R 5 do not exist;
  • R 2 is independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); nl, n2, n
  • R 2 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , Rn, R 12 , R 13 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl- S -peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • Suitable copper antagonist compounds of Formula I include, for example:
  • Suitable compounds of Formula I include, for example, one or more of triethylenetetramine, salts of triethylenetetramine, prodrugs of triethylenetetramine and salts of such prodrugs; analogs of triethylenetetramine and salts and prodrugs of such analogs; and/or active metabolites of triethylenetetramine and salts and prodrugs of such metabolites, including but not limited to N-acetyl triethylenetetramine and salts and prodrugs of N-acetyl triethylenetetramine.
  • Triethylenetetramine is a strongly basic moiety with multiple nitrogens that can be converted into a large number of suitable associated acid addition salts using an acid, for example, by reaction of triethylenetetramine and of the acid, for example, stoichiometrically equivalent amounts, in a solvent, for example, an inert solvent such as, for example, ethanol or water and subsequent evaporation if the dosage form is best formulated from a dry salt.
  • a solvent for example, an inert solvent such as, for example, ethanol or water and subsequent evaporation if the dosage form is best formulated from a dry salt.
  • Possible acids for this reaction are in particular those that yield physiologically acceptable salts.
  • trientine active agents such as, for example, triethylenetetramine, that can be delivered as a salt(s) (such as acid addition salts, e.g., triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate or other acceptable hydrochloride or succinate salts)
  • act as copper- chelating or binding agents act as copper- chelating or binding agents, which aids the elimination of copper from the body by forming a stable
  • inorganic acids can be used, e.g., sulfuric acid, nitric acid, hydrohalic acids such as hydrochloric acid or hydrobromic acid, phosphoric acids such as orthophosphoric acid, and sulfamic acid. This is not an exhaustive list.
  • organic acids can be used to prepare suitable salt forms, in particular aliphatic, alicyclic, araliphatic, aromatic or heterocyclic mono-or polybasic carboxylic, sulfonic or sulfuric acids, (e.g., formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, pivalic acid, diethylacetic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, pimelic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, lactic acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, citric acid, gluconic acid, ascorbic acid, nicotinic acid, isonicotinic acid, methane-or ethanesulfonic acid, ethanedisulfonic acid, 2- hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, naphthalenemono-and-disulfonic acids, and laurylsulfuric acid).
  • sulfonic or sulfuric acids
  • Organic acids include both aliphatic and aromatic carboxylic acids and include, for example, aliphatic monocarboxylic acids, aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, aliphatic tricarboxylic acids, aromatic monocarboxylic acids, aromatic dicarboxylic acids, aromatic tricarboxylic acids and other organic acids known to those of skill in the art.
  • Aliphatic carboxylic acids may be saturated or unsaturated. Suitable aliphatic carboxylic acids include those having from 2 to about 10 carbon atoms.
  • Aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include saturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids and unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids.
  • saturated monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, propronic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, caproic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, pelargonic acid, and caprynic acid.
  • unsaturated aliphatic monocarboxylic acids include acrylic acid, propiolic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid and isocrotonic acid.
  • Aliphatic dicarboxylic acids include saturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids and unsaturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids.
  • saturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids examples include oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, suberic acid, azelaic acid, and sebacic acid.
  • unsaturated aliphatic dicarboxylic acids examples include maleic acid, fumaric acid, citraconic acid, mesaconic acid, itaconic acid and the like.
  • Aliphatic tricarboxylic acids includes saturated aliphatic tricarboxylic acids and unsaturated tricarboxylic acids. Examples of saturated tricarboxylic acids include tricarballylic acid, 1, 2, 3-butanetricarboxylic acid and the like.
  • Suitable aliphatic dicarboxylic acids include those of the formula: HOOC-Q 1 -COOH, wherein Q 1 is alkylene of 1 to about 8 carbon atoms or alkenylene of 2 to about 8 atoms, and includes both straight chain and branched chain alkylene and alkenylene groups.
  • aromatic dicarboxylic acids include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid and the like.
  • aromatic tricarboxylic acids include trimesic acid, hemimellitic acid and trimellitic acid.
  • Nitrogen- containing copper chelator(s) or binding com ⁇ ound(s), for example, trientine active agents such as, for example, triethylenetetramine, can also be in the form of quarternary ammonium salts in which the nitrogen atom carries a suitable organic group such as an alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aralkyl moiety.
  • such nitrogen-containing copper chelator(s) are in the form of a compound or buffered in solution and/or suspension nearer to a neutral pH, lower than the pH 14 of a solution of triethylenetetramine itself.
  • trientine active agents include derivative trientine active agents, for example, triethylenetetramine in combination with picolinic acid (2-pyridinecarboxylic acid). These derivatives include, for example, triethylenetetramine picolinate and salts of triethylenetetramine picolinate, for example, triethylenetetramine picolinate HCl. These also include, for example, triethylenetetramine di-picolinate and salts of triethylenetetramine di-picolinate, for example, triethylenetetramine di- picolinate HCl.
  • Picolinic acid moieties may be attached to triethylenetetramine, for example, one or more of the CH 2 moieties, using chemical techniques known in the art.
  • compounds suitable as copper antagonists include compounds of Formula I(a): Formula I(a)
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 are N or one of X 1 , X 2 , X 3 and X 4 is O or S and the remainder are N; n l5 n 2 , and n 3 are 2 or 3; R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are H or absent; and R 7 , Rg, R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , and R 12 , are independently selected from the group consisting of H, CH 3 and CH 2 CH 3 and wherein; if X 1 is S or O, then R 2 is absent; if X 2 is S or O, the R 3 is absent; if X 3 is S or O, then R 4 is absent; and if X 4 is S or O, then R 6 is absent.
  • Additional compounds suitable as copper antagonists include cyclic and acyclic compounds according to Formula II:
  • X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are independently selected from the group consisting of N, S and O;
  • R 1> R 2> R 3j R 5 and R 6 may be functionalized for attachment to groups which include, but are not limited to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • groups which include, but are not limited to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include, but are not limited to, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl to ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 may be functionalized for attachment to groups which include, but are not limited to, peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • groups which include, but are not limited to, peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols (PEGs) and other suitable chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include, but are not limited to, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl to ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl to ClO alkyl-S- ⁇ eptide and Cl to ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • suitable compounds of Formula I include those wherein R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 and R 6 are independently selected from H, Cl to C6 alkyl, -CH 2 COOH, -CH 2 SO 3 H, -CH 2 PO(OH) 2 and -CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); and each R 7, R 8, R 9 and R 10 is independently selected from H and Cl to C6 alkyl.
  • suitable compounds include those wherein at least one Of R 1 and R 2 and at least one of R 5 and R 6 is H or Cl to C6 alkyl.
  • R 3 is selected from H or Cl to C6 alkyl; more particularly, R 1, R 2, R 5, and R 6 are selected from H or Cl to C6 alkyl.
  • R 1, R 6, R 7 , R 8, R 9 and R 10 are independently selected from H and Cl to C3 alkyl.
  • all of X 1, X 2 and X 3 are suitably N or, alternatively, one of X 1 and X 3 is S and X 2 are N or S.
  • Tri-heteroatom compounds within Formula II are provided where X 1 , X 2 , and X 3 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O such that, (a) for a three-nitrogen series, when X 1 , X 2 , and X 3 are N then: R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 6 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH,
  • one or several OfR 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , or R 1O may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half-lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl- ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 3 does not exist;
  • one or several OfR 1 , R 2 , R 5 or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO ⁇ alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , or R 10 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half-lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 5 does not exist;
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl- ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , or R 10 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half-lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • a series of tri-heteroatom cyclic analogues according to the above Formula II are provided in which R 1 and R 6 are joined together to form the bridging group (CR ⁇ R 12 ) n3 , and X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O such that:
  • R 2 , R 3 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG 5 Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 1O , Rn, or R- 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-S- ⁇ e ⁇ tide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 5 does not exist;
  • R 2 or R 3 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half-lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , Rio * Rib or R 1 2 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 3 and R 5 do not exist;
  • R 2 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl- CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-
  • ClO alkyl-NH-protein Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • Copper antagonists useful in the invention also include copper chelators that have been pre-complexed with a non-copper metal ion prior to administration for therapy.
  • Metal ions used for pre-complexing have a lower association constant for the copper antagonist than that of copper.
  • a metal ion for pre-complexing a copper antagonist that chelates Cu 2+ is one that has a lower binding affinity for the copper antagonist than Cu 2+ .
  • Preferred metal ions for precomplexing include calcium (e.g., Ca 2+ ), magnesium (e.g., Mg 2+ ), chromium (e.g., Cr 2+ and Cr 3+ ), manganese (e.g., Mn 2+ ), zinc (e.g., Zn 2+ ), selenium (e.g., Se 4+ ), and iron (e.g., Fe 2+ and Fe 3+ ).
  • Most preferred metal ions for precomplexing are calcium, zinc, and iron.
  • metals include, for example, cobalt (e.g., Co 2+ ), nickel (e.g., Ni 2+ ), silver (e.g., Ag 1+ ), and bismuth (e.g., Bi 3+ ).
  • Co 2+ cobalt
  • Ni 2+ nickel
  • silver e.g., Ag 1+
  • bismuth e.g., Bi 3+
  • Metals are chosen with regard, for example, to their relative binding to the copper antagonist, and relative to toxicity and the dose of the copper antagonist to be administered.
  • metal complexes comprising copper antagonists and non- copper metals (that have lower binding affinities than copper for the copper antagonist) and one or more additional ligands than typically found in complexes of that metal.
  • additional ligands may serve to block sites of entry into the complex for water, oxygen, hydroxide, or other species that may undesirably complex with the metal ion and can cause degradation of the copper antagonist.
  • copper complexes of triethylenetetramine have been found to form pentacoordinate complexes with a tetracoordinated triethylenetetramine and a chloride ligand when crystallized from a salt solution rather than a tetracoordinate Cu 2+ triethylenetetramine complex.
  • copper chelators such as Cu2+ chelators, spermidine, spermine, tetracyclam, etc.
  • additional complexing agents such as anions in solution, for example, I “ , Br “ , F “ , (SO 4 ) 2" , (CO 3 ) “ , BF “ , NO " , ethylene, pyridine, etc.
  • complexes with more accessible metal ions such as planar complexes or complexes having four or fewer coordinating agents, where one or more additional complexing agents could provide additional shielding to the metal from undesirable ligands that might otherwise access the metal and displace a desired complexing agent.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention may be made using any of a variety of chemical synthesis, isolation, and purification methods known in the art.
  • Published United States Patent Application No. 2006/0041170 describes the synthesis of certain triethylenetetramine salts. Exemplary synthetic routes are described below. General synthetic chemistry protocols are somewhat different for these classes of molecules due to their propensity to chelate with metallic cations, including copper. Glassware should be cleaned and silanized prior to use. Plasticware should be chosen specifically to have minimal presence of metal ions. Metal implements such as spatulas should be excluded from any chemistry protocol involving chelators. Water used should be purified by sequential carbon filtering, ion exchange and reverse osmosis to the highest level of purity possible, not by distillation. All organic solvents used should be rigorously purified to exclude any possible traces of metal ion contamination.
  • Ion exchange resins should be washed clean of any possible metal contamination.
  • Many of the synthetic routes allow for control of the particular R groups introduced.
  • synthetic amino acids can be used to incorporate a variety of substituent R groups.
  • the dichloroethane synthetic schemes also allow for the incorporation of a wide variety of R groups by using dichlorinated ethane derivatives. It will be appreciated that many of these synthetic schemes can lead to isomeric forms of the compounds; such isomers can be separated using techniques known in the art.
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O such that:
  • R 7 , R ⁇ , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , and R 12 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2- ClO straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , Rn 5 or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and C 1 -C 10 alkyl- S -protein.
  • R 1 through R 12 are other than hydrogen.
  • the compounds of Formulae I, I(a) or II are selective for a particular oxidation state of copper.
  • the compounds may be selected so that they preferentially bind oxidized copper, or copper (II). Copper selectivity can be assayed using methods known in the art. Competition assays can be done using isotopes of copper (I) and copper (II) to determine the ability of the compounds to selectively bind one form of copper.
  • the compounds of Formulae I, I(a) or II may be chosen to avoid excessive lipophilicity, for example by avoiding large or numerous alkyl substituents. Excessive lipophilicity can cause the compounds to bind to and/or pass through cellular membranes, thereby decreasing the amount of compound available for chelating copper, particularly for extracellular copper, which may be predominantly in the oxidized form of copper (II).
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 5 and R 6 can be accomplished with this chemistry by standard procedures.
  • the oxalamide approach also can lead to successful syntheses of this class of compounds, although the central substituents are always going to be hydrogen or its isotopes with this kind of chemistry.
  • This particular variant makes use of the trichloroethyl ester group to protect one of the carboxylic acid functions of oxalic acid but other protecting groups are also envisaged.
  • Reaction of an amino acid amide derived from a natural or unnatural amino acid with a differentially protected oxalyl mono chloride gives the mono-oxalamide shown which can be reacted under standard peptide coupling condition to give the un-symmetrical bis- oxalamide which can then be reduced with diborane to give the desired tetra-aza derivative.
  • 3NX series 1 when X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , are N and X 4 is S or O then:
  • C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- ⁇ e ⁇ tide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , Rn, or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • Variations of the syntheses used for the 4N series provide examples of the 3N series 1 class of compounds.
  • the chemistry described by Meares et al. can be modified to give examples of the 3NX series of compounds.
  • X 4 is O
  • the incorporation Of R 1 , R 2 , R 5 and R 6 can be accomplished with this chemistry by standard procedures.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 6 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, Cl-
  • nl, n2, and n3 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2, and n3 may be the same as or different than any other repeat;
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , and R 12 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2- ClO straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S -protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 5 and R 6 can be accomplished with this chemistry by standard procedures.
  • 2N2X series 1 when X 2 and X 3 are N and X 1 and X 4 are O or S then:
  • R 1 and R 6 do not exist
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , Rn, and R 12 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2- ClO straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , Rg, R 9 , R 10 , Rn, or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • the oxalamide approach can lead to successful syntheses of this class of compounds.
  • This particular variant makes use of the trichloroethyl ester group to protect one of the carboxylic acid functions of oxalic acid but other protecting groups are also envisaged.
  • Reaction of an aminoalcohol or aminothiol derivative readily available from a natural or unnatural amino acid with a differentially protected oxalyl mono chloride gives the mono-oxalamide shown which can be reacted under standard peptide coupling condition to give the un-symmetrical bis- oxalamide which can then be reduced with diborane to give the desired tetra-aza derivative.
  • R 3 and R 6 do not exist
  • R 7 , R 8 , Rp, R 1 O, R 11J and R 12 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-
  • C1-C6 alkyl aryl C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • one or several OfR 1 , R 2 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG 5 Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 5 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, Cl-
  • nl, n2, and n3 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2, and n3 may be the same as or different than any other repeat;
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 1O , Rn, and R 12 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2- ClO straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C 1 -C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • one or several OfR 1 , R 2 , R 3 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alky 1-S -protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • one or several OfR 1 , R 2 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , Rj 0 , Rn 5 or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl- S -peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 1 and R 2 are joined together to form the bridging group (CR 13 R ]4 )n4;
  • Xi, X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O such that: 4N macrocyclic series: when Xi, X 2 , X 3 , and X 4 are N then:
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , Rio, Rn, Ri 2 , Ri 3 and R w are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3- ClO cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein. Furthermore one or several of R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11?
  • R 12 5 R- 1 3 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco- kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl- NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- protein.
  • Triethylenetetramine itself has been synthesized by reaction of 2 equivalents of ethylene diamine with 1,2-dichloro ethane to give triethylenetetramine directly.
  • Possible side products from this synthesis include the 12N4 macrocycle shown below, which could also be synthesized directly from Triethylenetetramine by reaction with a further equivalent of 1,2-dichloro ethane under appropriately dilute concentrations to provide the 12N4 macrocycle shown.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 5 and R 6 can be accomplished with this chemistry by standard procedures.
  • the oxalamide approach also can lead to successful syntheses of this class of compounds.
  • This particular variant makes use of the trichloroethyl ester group to protect one of the carboxylic acid functions of oxalic acid but other protecting groups are also envisaged.
  • Reaction of an amino acid amide derived from a natural or unnatural amino acid with a differentially protected oxalyl mono chloride gives the mono-oxalamide shown which can be reacted under standard peptide coupling condition to give the un-symmetrical bis-oxalamide which can then be reduced with diborane to give the desired tetra-aza derivative.
  • Further reaction with oxalic acid gives the cyclic derivative, which can then be reduced once again with diborane to give the 12N4 series of compounds.
  • R 5 does not exist
  • R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH 5 CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); nl, n2, n3, and n4 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2, n3 and n4 may be the same as or different than any other repeat; and
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 1O , R 11 , R 12 , Ri 3 and R 14 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3- ClO cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 , R 3 or R 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl- NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- protein.
  • Triethylenetetramine itself has been synthesized by reaction of 2 equivalents of ethylene diamine with 1,2-dichloro ethane to give triethylenetetramine directly.
  • Possible side products from this synthesis include the 12N4 macrocycle shown below, which could also be synthesized directly from Triethylenetetramine by reaction with a further equivalent of 1,2-dichloro ethane under appropriately dilute concentrations to provide the 12N4 macrocycle shown. Modification of this procedure by using starting materials with appropriate R groups leads to symmetrically substituted 12N4 macrocycle examples as shown below:
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 5 and R 6 can be accomplished with this chemistry by standard procedures.
  • R 3 and R 4 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, Cl- C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl,
  • nl, n2, n3, and n4 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2, n3 and n4 may be the same as or different than any other repeat; and
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , Rj 2 , R 13 and R 14 are independently chosen from H 5 CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3- ClO cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl
  • R 3 , or R 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , Rg, R 9 , R 1 O, Rn, Ri 2> R13 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl- NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- protein.
  • R 2 and R 4 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, Cl- C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH 5 CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 2PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 O(OH); nl, n2, n3, and n4 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2, n3 and n4 may be the same as or different than any other repeat; and
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 and R 14 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3- ClO cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 , or R 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 or R 14 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl- NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • Triethylenetetramine itself has been synthesized by reaction of 2 equivalents of ethylene diamine with 1,2-dichloro ethane to give triethylenetetramine directly.
  • Possible side products from this synthesis include the 12N4 macrocycle shown below, which could also be synthesized directly from Triethylenetetramine by reaction with a further equivalent of 1,2-dichloro ethane under appropriately dilute concentrations to provide the 12N4 macrocycle shown. Modification of this procedure by using starting materials with appropriate R groups would lead to symmetrically substituted 12N4 macrocycle examples as shown below:
  • R 2 is independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl,
  • nl, n2, n3, and n4 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2, n3 and n4 may be the same as or different than any other repeat; and
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , Ri 2 , R 13 and R 14 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3- ClO cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 1O , R 11 , Ri 2 , Ri 3 or Ri 4 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmacokinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl- NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • Triethylenetetramine itself has been synthesized by reaction of 2 equivalents of ethylene diamine with 1,2-dichloro ethane to give triethylenetetramine directly.
  • Possible side products from this synthesis include the 12N4 macrocycle shown below, which could also be synthesized directly from Triethylenetetramine by reaction with a further equivalent of 1,2-dichloro ethane under appropriately dilute concentrations to provide the 12N4 macrocycle shown. Modification of this procedure by using starting materials with appropriate R groups would lead to substituted 12NX3 macrocycle examples as shown below:
  • protecting group chemistry such as the widely used BOC (t- butyloxycarbonyl) group and an appropriate O or S protecting group allows the chemistry to be directed specifically towards the substitution pattern shown.
  • Other approaches such as via the chemistry of ethyleneimine may also lead to a subset of the mono-aza 3 X series.
  • a variant of this approach using substituted dichloroethane derivatives could be used to access more complex substitution patterns. This would lead to mixtures of position isomers, which can be separated by HPLC.
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 3 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O such that:
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , and R 10 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl,
  • C1-C6 alkyl aryl C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 5 or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl- ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , or R 10 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • Triethylenetetramine itself has been synthesized by reaction of 2 equivalents of ethylene diamine with 1,2-dichloro ethane to give Triethylenetetramine directly.
  • a variant of this procedure by using starting materials with appropriate R groups and l-amino,2-chloro ethane would lead to some open chain 3N examples as shown below:
  • R 3 does not exist
  • R 7 , R 8 , Rp, and R 10 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl,
  • one or several OfR 1 , R 2 , R 5 or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , or R 10 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 5 does not exist;
  • R 7 , Rg, R 9 , and R 1O are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, Cl-
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 5 , or R 6 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO- PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , or R 10 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • Tri-heteroatom cyclic series of Formula II Tri-heteroatom cyclic series of Formula II:
  • R 1 and R 6 form a bridging group (CR 1 iR 12 )n3;
  • X 1 , X 2 , and X 3 are independently chosen from the atoms N, S or O such that: 3N series: when X 1 , X 2 and X 3 are N then:
  • C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 , R 3 , or R 5 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl- ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 1O , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- ⁇ e ⁇ tide, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • Triethylenetetramine itself has been synthesized by reaction of 2 equivalents of ethylene diamine with 1,2-dichloro ethane to give Triethylenetetramine directly.
  • a variant of this procedure by using starting materials with appropriate R groups and l-amino,2-chloro ethane would lead to open chain 3N examples which could then be cyclized by reaction with an appropriate 1,2 dichloroethane derivative as shown below: H H 2 N ' ⁇ - ⁇ * + Cl ⁇ 01 ⁇ H 2 N ⁇ N ⁇ X N" ⁇ / NH2
  • R 5 does not exist
  • R 2 and R 3 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, Cl-
  • nl, n2, and n3 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2 and n3 may be the same as or different than any other repeat;
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , Ri b and R 12 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-
  • C1-C6 alkyl aryl C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 or R 3 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco- kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl- ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and C 1 -C 10 alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S-protein.
  • R 1 , and R 2 can be accomplished with this chemistry by standard procedures.
  • R 2 is independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-C10 straight chain or branched alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, C1-C6 alkyl C3-C10 cycloalkyl, aryl, mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, heteroaryl, fused aryl, C1-C6 alkyl aryl, C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl, CH 2 COOH, CH 2 SO 3 H, CH 2 PO(OH) 2 , CH 2 P(CH 3 )O(OH); nl, n2, and n3 are independently chosen to be 2 or 3, and each repeat of any of nl, n2 and n3 may be the same as or different than any other repeat;
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , and R 12 are independently chosen from H, CH 3 , C2-
  • C1-C6 alkyl aryl C1-C6 alkyl mono, di, tri, tetra and penta substituted aryl, C1-C5 alkyl heteroaryl, C1-C6 alkyl fused aryl.
  • R 2 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH- peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S- peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl-S -protein.
  • R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , or R 12 may be functionalized for attachment, for example, to peptides, proteins, polyethylene glycols and other such chemical entities in order to modify the overall pharmaco-kinetics, deliverability and/or half lives of the constructs.
  • Examples of such functionalization include but are not limited to Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-peptide, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-protein, Cl-ClO alkyl-NH-CO-PEG, Cl-ClO alkyl-S-peptide, and Cl-ClO alkyl- S -protein.
  • Triethylenetetramine itself has been synthesized by reaction of 2 equivalents of ethylene diamine with 1,2-dichloro ethane to give Triethylenetetramine directly.
  • a variant of this procedure by using starting materials with appropriate R groups and l-amino 5 2-chloro ethane would lead to open chain 1N2X examples which could then be cyclized by reaction with an appropriate 1,2 dichloroethane derivative as shown below:
  • Copper antagonists and pharmaceutically acceptable salts for use according to the present invention may also be synthesized using methods described in U.S. Published Patent Application No. 2006/0041170, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • Any of the methods of treating a subject having or suspected of having or predisposed to, or at risk for, a disease, disorder, and/or condition, referenced or described herein may utilize the administration of any of the doses, dosage forms, formulations, compositions and/or devices herein described.
  • aspects of the invention include controlled or other doses, dosage forms, formulations, compositions and/or devices containing one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists, for example, one or more compounds of Formulae I 5 I(a) or II, or trientine active agents, including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, trientine analogues of formulae I, I(a) and II and salts thereof.
  • trientine active agents including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, trientine analogues of formulae I, I(a) and II and salts thereof.
  • the present invention includes, for example, doses and dosage forms for at least oral administration, transdermal delivery, topical application, suppository delivery, transmucosal delivery, injection (including subcutaneous administration, subdermal administration, intramuscular administration, depot administration, and intravenous administration (including delivery via bolus, slow intravenous injection, and intravenous drip), infusion devices (including implantable infusion devices, both active and passive), administration by inhalation or insufflation, buccal administration, sublingual administration, and ophthalmic administration.
  • injection including subcutaneous administration, subdermal administration, intramuscular administration, depot administration, and intravenous administration (including delivery via bolus, slow intravenous injection, and intravenous drip)
  • infusion devices including implantable infusion devices, both active and passive
  • administration by inhalation or insufflation buccal administration, sublingual administration, and ophthalmic administration.
  • the invention includes, for example, methods for treating a subject having or suspected of having or predisposed to, or at risk for, any diseases, disorders and/or conditions characterized in whole or in part by (a) hypercupremia and/or copper- related tissue damage and (b) hyperlipidemia, hypercholesterolemia (e.g., elevated cholesterol in low-density lipoprotein (LDL-C)), hypertension, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, and/or impaired fasting glucose, comprising administering a composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable copper antagonist and an antihypertensive agent.
  • hyperlipidemia e.g., elevated cholesterol in low-density lipoprotein (LDL-C)
  • hypercholesterolemia e.g., elevated cholesterol in low-density lipoprotein (LDL-C)
  • hypertension e.g., elevated cholesterol in low-density lipoprotein (LDL-C)
  • hyperglycemia e.g., elevated cholesterol in low-density lipo
  • Such compounds may be administered in amounts, for example, that are effective to (1) decrease body and/or tissue copper levels, (2) increase copper output in the urine of a subject, (3) decrease copper uptake, for example, in the gastrointestinal tract, 4) decrease SOD, for example, EC-SOD, as measured by mass or activity, (5) decrease homocysteine, (6) decrease oxidative stress (7) increase copper (I), and/or (8) lower blood pressure.
  • the invention includes methods for treating and/or preventing, in whole or in part, various diseases, disorders and conditions, including, for example, atherosclerosis, coronary heart disease, hypercholesterolemia, hyperlipidemia, hypertension, impaired glucose tolerance; impaired fasting glucose; diabetes and/or its complications, including type 1 and type 2 diabetes and their complications; insulin resistance; Syndrome X; obesity and other weight related disorders; cardiomyopathy, including diabetic cardiomyopathy; hyperglycemia, and/or hyperinsulinemia, tissue ischemia, and diseases and disorders characterized at least in part by any one or more of hyperglycemia, hypercholesterolemia, hypertension, hyperinsulinemia, hyperlipidemia, atherosclerosis, and tissue ischemia; and, diseases, disorders or conditions characterized in whole or in part by (a) hypercupremia and/or copper-related tissue damage and (b) elevated or undesired blood pressure levels, hypercholesterolemia, hypertension, hyperglycemia, insulin resistance, impaired glucose tolerance, and/or impaired fasting glucose, or predisposition
  • disorders to be treated using the compositions and methods of the invention include disorders of the heart muscle, including heart failure; myocardial infarction; cardiomyopathy, including idiopathic cardiomyopathy, metabolic cardiomyopathy, alcoholic cardiomyopathy, drug- induced cardiomyopathy, ischemic cardiomyopathy, and hypertensive cardiomyopathy. Still other disorders that may be treated using the compositions and methods of the invention are hypertension and stroke.
  • diabetic acute coronary syndrome e.g., myocardial infarction, diabetic hypertensive cardiomyopathy, acute coronary syndrome associated with impaired glucose tolerance (IGT), acute coronary syndrome associated with impaired fasting glucose (IFG), hypertensive cardiomyopathy associated with IGT, hypertensive cardiomyopathy associated with IFG, ischemic cardiomyopathy associated with IGT, ischemic cardiomyopathy associated with IFG, ischemic cardiomyopathy associated with coronary heart disease (CHD), acute coronary syndrome not associated with any abnormality of the glucose metabolism, hypertensive cardiomyopathy not associated with any apparent abnormality of glucose metabolism, ischemic cardiomyopathy not associated with any apparent abnormality of glucose metabolism (irrespective of whether or not such ischemic cardiomyopathy is associated with coronary heart disease or not), and any disease of the vascular tree including disease states of the aorta, carotid, cerebrovascular, coronary, renal, retinal, vasa nervorum, iliac,
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a copper antagonist for example a copper chelator, including but not limited to trientine, trientine salts, trientine analogues of Formulae I, I(a) and II, and so on, is from about 1 mg/kg to about 1 g/kg.
  • Other therapeutically effective dose ranges include, for example, from about 1.5 mg/kg to about 950 mg/kg, about 2 mg/kg to about 900 mg/kg, about 3 mg/kg to about 850
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a copper antagonist including for example, trientine, trientine salts, trientine
  • 20 analogues of Formulae I, I(a) and II, and so on is from about 10 mg to about 4 g per day.
  • Other therapeutically effective dose ranges include, for example, from about 20 mg to about 3.9 g, from about 30 mg to about 3.7 g, from about 40 mg to about 3.5 g, from about 50 mg to about 3 g, from about 60 mg to about 2.8 g, from about 70 mg to about 2.5 g, about 80 mg to about 2.3 g, about 100 mg to about 2 g, about
  • Copper antagonists including, for example, trientine, trientine salts, trientine analogues of Formulae I 5 I(a) and II, and so on, will also be effective at doses in the order of 1/10, 1/50, 1/100, 1/200, 1/300, 1/400, 1/500 and even 1/1000 of those described herein.
  • low dose copper antagonists may include compounds, including copper chelators, particularly Cu+2 chelators, including but not limited to trientine active agents and compounds of Formulae I 5 I(a) and II, and the like, in an amount sufficient to provide, for example, dosages from about 0.001 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg, about 0.01 mg/kg to about 4.5 mg/kg, about 0.02 mg/kg to about 4 mg/kg, about 0.02 to about 3.5 mg/kg, about 0.02 mg/kg to about 3 mg/kg, about 0.05 mg/kg to about 2.5 mg/kg, about 0.05 mg/kg to about 2 mg/kg, about 0.05-0.1 mg/kg to about 5 mg/kg, about 0.05- 0.1 mg/kg to about 4 mg/kg, about 0.05-0.1 mg/kg to about 3 mg/kg, about 0.05-0.1 mg/kg to about 2 mg/kg, about 0.05-0.1 mg/kg to about 0.05-0.1 mg/kg to about 3 mg/kg, about 0.05-0.1 mg/kg to about 2 mg/kg
  • a therapeutically effective amount is an amount effective to elicit a plasma concentration of a copper antagonist, for example, a copper chelator, including for example, trientine active agents, including but not limited to trientine, trientine salts, and compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II, and so on, from about 0.01 mg/L to about 20 mg/L, about 0.01 mg/L to about 15 mg/L, about 0.1 mg/L to about 10 mg/L, about 0.5 mg/L to about 9 mg/L, about 1 mg/L to about 8 mg/L, about 2 mg/L to about 7mg/L or about 3 mg/L to about 6 mg/L.
  • Dose ranges for antihypertensive agents are discussed herein and additionally are known to those skilled in the art.
  • doses described herein may be administered in a single dose or multiple doses. For example, doses may be administered, once, twice, three, four or more times a day. Any such dose may be administered by any of the routes or in any of the forms herein described. It will be appreciated that any of the dosage forms, compositions, formulations or devices described herein particularly for oral administration may be utilized, where applicable or desirable, in a dosage form, composition, formulation or device for administration by any of the other routes herein contemplated or commonly employed.
  • a dose or doses could be given parenterally using a dosage form suitable for parenteral administration which may incorporate features or compositions described in respect of dosage forms suitable for oral administration, or be delivered in an oral dosage form such as a modified release, extended release, delayed release, slow release or repeat action oral dosage form.
  • the invention also is directed to doses, dosage forms, formulations, compositions and/or devices comprising one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists, for example, one or more compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II and salts thereof, and one or more trientine active agents, including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, trientine analogues and salts thereof, useful for therapy of diseases, disorders, and/or conditions in humans and other mammals and other disorders as disclosed herein.
  • the use of these dosage forms, formulations compositions and/or devices of copper antagonism enables effective treatment of these conditions, through novel and improved formulations suitable for administration to humans and other mammals.
  • the invention provides, for example, dosage forms, formulations, devices and/or compositions containing one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists, for example, copper chelators, such as copper (II) chelators), including one or more compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II and salts thereof, and trientine active agents, including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and salts thereof.
  • copper chelators such as copper (II) chelators
  • trientine active agents including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and salts thereof.
  • the dosage forms, formulations, devices and/or compositions of the invention may be formulated to optimize bioavailability and to maintain plasma concentrations within therapeutic range, including for extended periods, and results in increases in the time that plasma concentrations of the antihypertensive agent(s) and/or copper antagonist(s) remain within a desired therapeutic range at the site or sites of action.
  • Controlled delivery preparations also optimize the drug concentration at the site of action and minimize periods of under and over medication, for example.
  • the dosage forms, formulated, devices and/or compositions of the invention may be formulated for periodic administration, including once daily administration, to provide low dose controlled and/or low dose long-lasting in vivo release of an antihypertensive agent and a copper antagonist, for example, a copper chelator for chelation of copper and excretion of copper via the urine and/or to provide enhanced bioavailability of a antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, such as a copper chelator for chelation of copper and excretion of copper via the urine.
  • a copper chelator for chelation of copper and excretion of copper via the urine
  • a copper chelator for chelation of copper and excretion of copper via the urine
  • a copper chelator for chelation of copper and excretion of copper via the urine.
  • dosage forms suitable for oral administration include, but are not limited to tablets, capsules, lozenges, or like forms, or any liquid forms such as syrups, aqueous solutions, emulsions and the like, capable of providing a therapeutically effective amount of a antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist.
  • dosage forms suitable for transdermal administration include, but are not limited, to transdermal patches, transdermal bandages, and the like.
  • dosage forms suitable for topical administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention are any lotion, stick, spray, ointment, paste, cream, gel, etc. whether applied directly to the skin or via an intermediary such as a pad, patch or the like.
  • Examples of dosage forms suitable for suppository administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention include any solid dosage form inserted into a bodily orifice particularly those inserted rectally, vaginally and urethrally.
  • Examples of dosage forms suitable for transmucosal delivery of the compounds and formulations of the invention include depositories solutions for enemas, pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams, nebulised solutions, powders and similar formulations containing in addition to the active ingredients such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.
  • Examples of dosage of forms suitable for injection of the compounds and formulations of the invention include delivery via bolus such as single or multiple administrations by intravenous injection, subcutaneous, subdermal, and intramuscular administration or oral administration.
  • dosage forms suitable for depot administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention include pellets or small cylinders of active agent or solid forms wherein the active agent is entrapped in a matrix of biodegradable polymers, microemulsions, liposomes or is microencapsulated.
  • infusion devices for compounds and formulations of the invention include infusion pumps containing one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists, for example one or more copper chelators, such as for example, one or more compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II and salts thereof, or trientine active agents, including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, at a desired amount for a desired number of doses or steady state administration, and include implantable drug pumps.
  • copper chelators such as for example, one or more compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II and salts thereof
  • trientine active agents including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, at a desired amount
  • implantable infusion devices for compounds, and formulations of the invention include any solid form in which the active agent is encapsulated within or dispersed throughout a biodegradable polymer or synthetic, polymer such as silicone, silicone rubber, silastic or similar polymer.
  • dosage forms suitable for inhalation or insufflation of the compounds and formulations of the invention include compositions comprising solutions and/or suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous, or organic solvents, or mixture thereof and/or powders.
  • dosage forms suitable for buccal administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention include lozenges, tablets and the like, compositions comprising solutions and/or suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous, or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof and/or powders.
  • Examples of dosage forms suitable for sublingual administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention include lozenges, tablets and the like, compositions comprising solutions and/or suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous, or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof and/or powders.
  • Examples of dosage forms suitable for opthalmic administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention include inserts and/or compositions comprising solutions and/or suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous, or organic solvents.
  • controlled drug formulations useful for delivery of the compounds and formulations of the invention are found in, for example, Sweetman, S. C. (Ed.). Martindale. The Complete Drug Reference, 33rd Edition, Pharmaceutical Press, Chicago, 2002, 2483 pp.; Aulton, M.E. (Ed.) Pharmaceutics. The Science of Dosage Form Design. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh, 2000, 734 pp.; and, Ansel, H. C, Allen, L.V. and Popovich, N. G. Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, 7th Ed., Lippincott 1999, 676 pp. Excipients employed in the manufacture of drug delivery systems are described in various publications known to those skilled in the art including, for example, Kibbe, E.H.
  • the USP also provides examples of modified-release oral dosage forms, including those formulated as tablets or capsules. See, for example, The United States Pharmacopeia 23/National Formulary 18, The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville MD, 1995 (hereinafter "the USP"), which also describes specific tests to determine the drug release capabilities of extended-release and delayed-release tablets and capsules.
  • the USP test for drug release for extended-release and delayed-release articles is based on drug dissolution from the dosage unit against elapsed test time. Descriptions of various test apparatus and procedures may be found in the USP.
  • the individual monographs contain specific criteria for compliance with the test and the apparatus and test procedures to be used. Examples have been given, for example for the release of aspirin from Aspirin Extended-release Tablets (for example, see: Ansel, H.C., Allen, L.V. and Popovich, N.G., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, 7th Ed., Lippincott 1999, p. 237). Modif ⁇ ed-release tablets and capsules must meet the USP standard for uniformity as described for conventional dosage units. Uniformity of dosage units may be demonstrated by either of two methods, weight variation or content uniformity, as described in the USP. Further guidance concerning the analysis of extended release dosage forms has been provided by the F.D.A. (See Guidance for Industry.
  • Extended release oral dosage forms development, evaluation, and application of in vitro/in vivo correlations. Rockville, MD: Center for Drug Evaluation and Research, Food and Drag Administration, 1997).
  • dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to modif ⁇ ed-release (MR) dosage forms including delayed-release (DR) forms; prolonged-action (PA) forms; controlled-release (CR) forms; extended-release (ER) forms; timed-release (TR) forms; and long-acting (LA) forms.
  • MR modif ⁇ ed-release
  • DR delayed-release
  • PA prolonged-action
  • CR controlled-release
  • ER extended-release
  • TR timed-release
  • LA long-acting
  • Modif ⁇ ed-release dosage forms of the invention include dosage forms having drug release features based on time, course, and/or location which are designed to accomplish therapeutic or convenience objectives not offered by conventional or immediate-release forms. See, for example, Bogner, R. H. Bioavailability and bioequivalence of extended-release oral dosage forms. U.S.
  • Extended- release dosage forms of the invention include, for example, as defined by The United States Food and Drug Administration (FDA), a dosage form that allows a reduction in dosing frequency to that presented by a conventional dosage form, e.g., a solution or an immediate-release dosage form. See, for example, Bogner, R.H. Bioavailability and bioequivalence of extended-release oral dosage forms. US Pharmacist 22 (Suppl.):3-12 (1997); Guidance for industry.
  • FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
  • Extended release oral dosage forms development, evaluation, and application of the in vitro/in vivo correlations.
  • Rockville, MD Center for Drug Evaluation and Research, Food and Drug Administration (1997).
  • Repeat action dosage forms of the invention include, for example, forms that contain two single doses of medication, one for immediate release and the second for delayed release.
  • Bi-layered tablets for example, may be prepared with one layer of drug for immediate release with the second layer designed to release drug later as either a second dose or in an extended-release manner.
  • Targeted-release dosage forms of the invention include, for example, formulations that facilitate drug release and which are directed towards isolating or concentrating a drug in a body region, tissue, or site for absorption or for drug action.
  • the invention in part provides dosage forms, formulations, devices and/or compositions and/or methods utilizing administration of dosage forms, formulations, devices and/or compositions incorporating one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists, for example one or more copper chelators, such as for example, one or more compounds of Formulae I, I(a) or II and salts thereof, and trientine active agents, including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, trientine tetrafumarate or other pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, complexed with one or more suitable anions to yield complexes that are only slowly soluble in body fluids.
  • copper chelators such as for example, one or more compounds of Formulae I, I(a) or II and salts thereof
  • trientine active agents including but not limited to, trientine, trientine dihydrochloride, trientine disuccinate, trientine tetramaleate, tri
  • modified release forms of one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists is produced by the incorporation of the active agent or agents into certain complexes such as those formed with the anions of various forms of tannic acid (for example, see: Merck Index 12th Ed., 9221). Dissolution of such complexes may depend, for example, on the pH of the environment. This slow dissolution rate provides for the extended release of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist. For example, salts of tannic acid, and/or tannates, provide for this quality, and are expected to possess utility for the treatment of conditions in which increased copper plays a role.
  • Rynatan (Wallace: see, for example, Madan, P. L., "Sustained release dosage forms," U.S. Pharmacist 15:39-50 (1990); Ryna-12 S, which contains a mixture of mepyramine tannate with phenylephrine tannate, Martindale 33rd Ed., 2080.4).
  • coated beads, granules or microspheres containing one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists are also included in the invention.
  • the invention also provides a method to achieve modified release of one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists by incoiporation of the drug into coated beads, granules, or microspheres.
  • Such formulations of one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists have utility for the treatment of diseases in humans and other mammals in which a antihypertensive agent and/or a copper antagonist, for example, trientine, is indicated.
  • the antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist is distributed onto beads, pellets, granules or other particulate systems.
  • a solution of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist substance is placed onto small inert nonpareil seeds or beads made of sugar and starch or onto microcrystalline cellulose spheres.
  • the nonpareil seeds are most often in the 425 to 850 micrometer range whereas the microcrystalline cellulose spheres are available ranging from 170 to 600 micrometers (see Ansel, H.C., Allen, L.V. and Popovich, N.G., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, 7th Ed., Lippincott 1999, p.
  • microcrystalline spheres are considered more durable during production than sugar-based cores (see: Celphere microcrystalline cellulose spheres. Philadelphia: FMC Corporation, 1996).
  • Methods for manufacture of microspheres suitable for drug delivery have been described (see, for example, Arshady, R. Microspheres and microcapsules: a survey of manufacturing techniques. 1: suspension and cross- linking. Polymer Eng Sci 30:1746-1758 (1989); see also, Arshady, R., Microspheres and microcapsules: a survey of manufacturing techniques. 2: coacervation. Polymer Eng Sci 30:905-914 (1990); see also: Arshady R., Microspheres and microcapsules: a survey of manufacturing techniques. 3: solvent evaporation.
  • the starting granules of material may be composed of the antihypertensive agent and/or the copper antagonist itself. Some of these granules may remain uncoated to provide immediate antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist release. Other granules (about two-thirds to three- quarters) receive varying coats of a lipid material such as beeswax, carnauba wax, glycerylmonostearate, cetyl alcohol, or a cellulose material such as ethylcellulose (infra).
  • a lipid material such as beeswax, carnauba wax, glycerylmonostearate, cetyl alcohol, or a cellulose material such as ethylcellulose (infra).
  • the coating material may be coloured with one or more dyes to distinguish granules or beads of different coating thickness (by depth of colour) and to provide distinctiveness to the product.
  • the granules may be placed in capsules or tablets.
  • Various coating systems are commercially available which are aqueous-based and which use ethylcellulose and plasticizer as the coating material (e.g., AquacoatTM [FMC Corporation, Philadelphia] and SurereleaseTM [Colorcon]; Aquacoat aqueous polymeric dispersion. Philadelphia: FMC Corporation, 1991; Surerelease aqueous controlled release coating system.
  • Aqueous-based coating systems eliminate the hazards and environmental concerns associated with organic solvent-based systems. Aqueous and organic solvent-based coating methods have been compared (see, for example, Hogan, J. E. Aqueous versus organic solvent coating.
  • the coated beads are about 1 mm in diameter. They are usually combined to have three or four release groups among the more than 100 beads contained in the dosing unit (see Madan, P. L. Sustained release dosage forms. U.S. Pharmacist 15:39-50 (1990)).
  • This provides the different desired sustained or extended release rates and the targeting of the coated beads to the desired segments of the gastrointestinal tract.
  • This type of dosage form is the SpansuleTM (SmithKline Beecham Corporation, U.K.).
  • film-forming polymers which can be used in water-insoluble release- slowing intermediate layer(s) (to be applied to a pellet, spheroid or tablet core) include ethylcellulose, polyvinyl acetate, Eudragit® RS, Eudragit® RL, etc. (Each of Eudragit® RS and Eudragit® RL is an ammonio methacrylate copolymer.
  • the release rate can be controlled not only by incorporating therein suitable water- soluble pore formers, such as lactose, mannitol, sorbitol, etc., but also by the thickness of the coating layer applied.
  • Multi tablets may be formulated which include small spheroid-shaped compressed minitablets that may have a diameter of between 3 to 4 mm and can be placed in gelatin capsule shell to provide the desired pattern of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release.
  • Each capsule may contain 8-10 minitablets, some uncoated for immediate release and others coated for extended release of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist.
  • a number of methods may be employed to generate modified-release dosage forms of one or more antihypertensive agents and one or more copper antagonists suitable for oral administration to humans and other mammals.
  • Two basic mechanisms are available to achieve modified release drug delivery. These are altered dissolution or diffusion of drugs and excipients.
  • four processes may be employed, either simultaneously or consecutively. These are as follows: (i) hydration of the device (e.g., swelling of the matrix); (ii) diffusion of water into the device; (iii) controlled or delayed dissolution of the drug; and (iv) controlled or delayed diffusion of dissolved or solubilized drug out of the device. See, e.g., Examples 11, 12, 23, 24, 35, and 36 herein.
  • extended antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist action for example, copper chelator action
  • copper chelator action may be achieved by affecting the rate at which the antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist is released from the dosage form and/or by slowing the transit time of the dosage form through the gastrointestinal tract (see Bogner, R.H., Bioavailability and bioequivalence of extended-release oral dosage forms. US Pharmacist 22 (Sup ⁇ l.):3-12 (1997)).
  • the rate of drug release from solid dosage forms may be modified by the technologies described below which, in general, are based on the following: 1) modifying drug dissolution by controlling access of biologic fluids to the drug through the use of barrier coatings; 2) controlling drug diffusion rates from dosage forms; and 3) chemically reacting or interacting between the drug substance or its pharmaceutical barrier and site-specific biological fluids. Systems by which these objectives are achieved are also provided herein.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is either coated or entrapped in a substance that is slowly digested or dispersed into the intestinal tract.
  • the rate of availability of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is a function of the rate of digestion of the dispersible material.
  • a further form of slow release dosage form of the compounds and formulations of the invention is any suitable osmotic system where semipermeable membranes of for example cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate propionate, is used to control the release of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist These can be coated with aqueous dispersions of enteric lacquers without changing release rate.
  • An example of such an osmotic system is an osmotic pump device, an example of which is the OrosTM device developed by Alza Inc. (U.S.A.).
  • This system comprises a core tablet surrounded by a semi-permeable membrane coating having a 0.4 mm diameter hole produced by a laser beam.
  • the core tablet has two layers, one containing the drug (the "active” layer) and the other containing a polymeric osmotic agent (the "push” layer).
  • the core layer consists of active drug, filler, a viscosity modulator, and a solubilizer.
  • the system operates on the principle of osmotic pressure.
  • This system is suitable for delivery of a wide range of antihypertensive agents and copper antagonists, including the compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II, and trientine active agents, or salts of any of them.
  • the coating technology is straightforward, and release is zero-order.
  • the semi-permeable membrane When the tablet is swallowed, the semi-permeable membrane permits aqueous fluid to enter from the stomach into the core tablet, dissolving or suspending the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist. As pressure increases in the osmotic layer, it forces or pumps the antihypertensive agents / copper antagonist solution out of the delivery orifice on the side of the tablet. Only the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist solution (not the undissolved antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist) is capable of passing through the hole in the tablet. The system is designed such that only a few drops of water are drawn into the tablet each hour.
  • the rate of inflow of aqueous fluid and the function of the tablet depends on the existence of an osmotic gradient between the contents of the bi-layer and the fluid in the gastrointestinal tract. Delivery is essentially constant as long as the osmotic gradient remains unchanged.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release rate may be altered by changing the surface area, the thickness or composition of the membrane, and/or by changing the diameter of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release orifice.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release rate is not affected by gastrointestinal acidity, alkalinity, fed conditions, or gut motility. The biologically inert components of the tablet remain intact during gut transit and are eliminated in the feces as an insoluble shell.
  • the invention also provides devices for compounds and formulations of the invention that utilize monolithic matrices including, for example, slowly eroding or hydrophilic polymer matrices, in which one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists is/are compressed or embedded.
  • Monolithic matrix devices comprising compounds and formulations of the invention include those formed using either of the following systems, for example: (I), antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist dispersed in a soluble matrix, which become increasingly available as the matrix dissolves or swells; examples include hydrophilic colloid matrices, such as hydroxypropylcellulose (BP) or hydroxypropyl cellulose (USP); hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC; BP, USP); methylcellulose (MC; BP, USP); calcium carboxymethylcellulose (Calcium CMC; BP, USP); acrylic acid polymer or carboxy polymethylene (Carbopol) or Carbomer (BP, USP); or linear glycuronan polymers such as alginic acid (BP, USP), for example those formulated into microparticles from alginic acid (alginate)-gelatin hydrocolloid coacervate systems, or those in which liposomes have been encapsulated by coatings of algin
  • the rate of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release depends upon the tortuous nature of the channels within the gel, and the viscosity of the entrapped fluid, such that different release kinetics can be achieved, for example, zero-order, or first-order combined with pulsatile release.
  • gels are not cross-linked, there is a weaker, non-permanent association between the polymer chains, which relies on secondary bonding.
  • high loading of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is achievable, and effective blending is frequent.
  • Devices may contain 20 - 80% of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist (w/w), along with gel modifiers that can enhance antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist diffusion; examples of such modifiers include sugars that can enhance the rate of hydration, ions that can influence the content of cross-links, and pH buffers that affect the level of polymer ionization.
  • Hydrophilic matrix devices of the invention may also contain one or more of pH buffers, surfactants, counter-ions, lubricants such as magnesium stearate (BP, USP) and a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide (USP; colloidal anhydrous silica, BP) in addition to antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist and hydrophilic matrix;
  • lubricants such as magnesium stearate (BP, USP) and a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide (USP; colloidal anhydrous silica, BP) in addition to antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist and hydrophilic matrix
  • USP colloidal silicon dioxide
  • antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist particles are dissolved in an insoluble matrix, from which antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist becomes available as solvent enters the matrix, often through channels, and dissolves the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist particles.
  • Examples include systems formed with a lipid matrix, or insoluble polymer matrix, including preparations formed from Carnauba wax (BP; USP); medium-chain triglyceride such as fractionated coconut oil (BP) or triglycerida saturata media (PhEur); or cellulose ethyl ether or ethylcellulose (BP, USP).
  • BP Carnauba wax
  • medium-chain triglyceride such as fractionated coconut oil (BP) or triglycerida saturata media (PhEur)
  • cellulose ethyl ether or ethylcellulose cellulose ethyl ether or ethylcellulose
  • Lipid matrices are simple and easy to manufacture, and incorporate the following blend of powdered components: lipids (20-40% hydrophobic solids w/w) which remain intact during the release process; antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, e.g., copper chelator; channeling agent, such as sodium chloride or sugars, which leaches from the formulation, forming aqueous micro-channels (capillaries) through which solvent enters, and through which antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is released.
  • lipids (20-40% hydrophobic solids w/w) which remain intact during the release process
  • antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist e.g., copper chelator
  • channeling agent such as sodium chloride or sugars, which leaches from the formulation, forming aqueous micro-channels (capillaries) through which solvent enters, and through which antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is released.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is embedded in an inert insoluble polymer and is released by leaching of aqueous fluid, which diffuses into the core of the device through capillaries formed between particles, and from which antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist 5 diffuses out of the device.
  • the rate of release is controlled by the degree of compression, particle size, and the nature and relative content (w/w) of excipients.
  • An example of such a device is that of Ferrous Gradumet (Martindale 33rd Ed., 1360.3).
  • a further example of a suitable insoluble matrix is an inert plastic matrix.
  • inert plastic material such as polyethylene, polyvinyl acetate, or polymethacrylate
  • the granulated mixture is then compressed into tablets.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is slowly released from the inert plastic matrix by diffusion (see, for example, Bodmeier, R. & Paeratakul, O., "Drug release from laminated polymeric films prepared from aqueous latexes," JPharm Sci 79:32-
  • monolithic matrix devices of the invention have compositions and formulations of the invention incorporated in pendent attachments to a polymer matrix (see, for example, Scholsky, K.M. and Fitch, R.M., Controlled release of pendant bioactive materials from acrylic polymer colloids. J Controlled Release 3:87-108 (1986)).
  • antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists e.g., copper chelators, are attached by means of an ester linkage to poly(acrylate) ester latex particles prepared by aqueous emulsion polymerization.
  • monolithic matrix devices of the invention incorporate dosage forms of the compositions and formulations of the invention in which the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is/are bound to a biocompatible polymer by a labile chemical bond, e.g., polyanhydrides prepared from a substituted anhydride (itself prepared by reacting an acid chloride with the drug: methacryloyl chloride and the sodium salt of methoxy benzoic acid) have been used to form a matrix with a second polymer (Eudragit RL) which releases drug on hydrolysis in gastric fluid (see: Chafi, N., Montheard, J. P. & Vergnaud, J. M. Release of 2- aminothiazole from polymeric carriers.
  • a labile chemical bond e.g., polyanhydrides prepared from a substituted anhydride (itself prepared by reacting an acid chloride with the drug: methacryloyl chloride and the sodium salt of methoxy benzoic acid) have been used to form a
  • the polymer selected for use must form a gelatinous layer rapidly enough to protect the inner core of the tablet from disintegrating too rapidly after ingestion.
  • the proportion of polymer is increased in a formulation so is the viscosity of the gel formed with a resulting decrease in the rate of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist diffusion and release (see Formulating for controlled release with Methocel Premium cellulose ethers. Midland, MI: Dow Chemical Company, 1995).
  • 20% (w/w) of HPMC results in satisfactory rates of drug release for an extended-release tablet formulation.
  • Two-layered tablets can be manufactured containing one or more of the compositions and formulations of the invention, with one layer containing the uncombined antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist for immediate release and the other layer having the antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist imbedded in a hydrophilic matrix for extended-release.
  • Three-layered tablets may also be similarly prepared, with both outer layers containing the antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist for immediate release.
  • Some commercial tablets are prepared with an inner core containing the extended-release portion of drug and an outer shell enclosing the core and containing drug for immediate release.
  • the invention also provides forming a complex between the compositions and formulations of the invention and an ion exchange resin, whereupon the complex may be tableted, encapsulated or suspended in an aqueous vehicle.
  • Release of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is dependent on the local pH and electrolyte concentration such that the choice of ion exchange resin may be made so as to preferentially release the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in a given region of the alimentary canal.
  • Delivery devices incorporating such a complex are also provided.
  • a modified release dosage form of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist can be produced by the incorporation of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist into complexes with an anion-exchange resin.
  • Solutions of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist may be passed through columns containing an ion-exchange resin to form a complex by the replacement of H 3 O ions.
  • the resin- antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist complex is then washed and may be tableted, encapsulated, or suspended in an aqueous vehicle.
  • the release of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is dependent on the pH and the electrolyte concentration in the gastrointestinal fluid. Release is greater in the acidity of the stomach than in the less acidic environment of the small intestine.
  • the antihypertensive agent and/or copper antagonist containing particles are minute, and may also be suspended to produce a liquid with extended-release characteristics, as well as solid dosage forms. Such preparations may also be suitable for administration, for example in depot preparations suitable for intramuscular injection.
  • the invention also provides a method to produce modified release preparations of one or more antihypertensive agent / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, by microencapsulation.
  • Microencapsulation is a process by which solids, liquids, or even gasses may be encapsulated into microscopic size particles through the formation of thin coatings of "wall" material around the substance being encapsulated such as disclosed in U.S. Patent Nos.
  • Gelatin BP, USP
  • synthetic polymers such as polyvinyl alcohol (USP), ethylcellulose (BP, USP), polyvinyl chloride, and other materials may also be used (see, for example, Zentner, G.M., Rork, G.S., and Himmelstein, K.J., Osmotic flow through controlled porosity films: an approach to delivery of water- soluble compounds, J Controlled Release 2:217-229 (1985); Fites, A.L., Banker, G.S., and Smolen, V.F., Controlled drug release through polymeric films, J Pharm Sci 59:610-613 (1970); Samuelov, Y., Donbrow, M., and Friedman, M., Sustained release of drugs from ethylcellulose-polyethylene glycol films and kinetics of drug release, J Pharm Sci
  • Encapsulation begins with the dissolving of the prospective wall material, say gelatin, in water.
  • One or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists for example, one or more copper chelators, is then added and the two-phase mixture is thoroughly stirred.
  • a solution of a second material is added.
  • This additive material for example, acacia, is chosen to have the ability to concentrate the gelatin
  • the coated particles are then admixed with tableting excipients and formed into dosage- sized tablets.
  • Different rates of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release may be obtained by changing the core-to-wall ratio, the polymer used for the coating, or the method of microencapsulation (for example, see: Yazici, E., Oner, L., Kas, H. S. & Hincal, A. A. Phenytoin sodium microspheres: bench scale formulation, process characterization and release kinetics. Pharmaceut Dev Technol 1996; 1:175-183).
  • microencapsulation the administered dose of one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, is subdivided into small units that are spread over a large area of the gastrointestinal tract, which may enhance absorption by diminishing localized antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist concentrations (see Yazici et al., supra).
  • An example of a drug that is commercially available in a microencapsulated extended-release dosage form is potassium chloride (Micro-K Exten-caps, Wyeth- Ayerst, Martindale 33rd Ed., pl968.1).
  • the invention also includes repeat action tablets containing one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators. These are prepared so that an initial dose of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is released immediately followed later by a second dose.
  • the tablets may be prepared with the immediate-release dose in the tablet's outer shell or coating with the second dose in the tablet's inner core, separated by a slowly permeable barrier coating.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist from the inner core is exposed to body fluids and released 4 to 6 hours after administration.
  • An example of this type of product is proved by Repetabs (Schering Inc.).
  • Repeat action dosage forms are suitable for the administration of one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists for the indications noted herein.
  • the invention also includes delayed-release oral dosage forms containing one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators.
  • the release of one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonist, for example, one or more copper chelators, from an oral dosage form can be intentionally delayed until it reaches the intestine at least in part by way of, for example, enteric coating.
  • Enteric coatings by themselves are not an efficient method for the delivery of antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists because of the inability of such coating systems to provide or achieve a sustained therapeutic effect after release onset.
  • Enteric coats are designed to dissolve or break down in an alkaline environment. The presence of food may increase the pH of the stomach. Therefore, the concurrent administration of enteric-coated antihypertensive agent / copper antagonists with food or the presence of food in the stomach may lead to dose dumping and unwanted secondary effects.
  • an antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist form that is capable of providing the controlled delivery of antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists in a predictable manner over a long period of time. See, e.g., Examples, 11, 12, 23, 24, 35, and 36 herein.
  • Enteric coatings have application in the present invention when combined or incorporated with one or more of the other dose delivery formulations or devices described herein. This form of delivery conveys the advantage of minimizing the gastric irritation that may be caused in some subjects by antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist such as, for example, trientine.
  • the enteric coating may be time- dependent, pH-dependent where it breaks down in the less acidic environment of the intestine and erodes by moisture over time during gastrointestinal transit, or enzyme-dependent where it deteriorates due to the hydrolysis-catalyzing action of intestinal enzymes (see, for example, Bengal, N.A., et ah, "Modifying the release properties of Eudragit L30D," Drug Dev IndPharm., 17:2497-2509 (1991)).
  • agents used to enteric coat tablets and capsules known to those skilled in the art are fats including triglycerides, fatty acids, waxes, shellac, and cellulose acetate phthalate although further examples of enteric coated preparations can be found in the USP.
  • the invention also provides devices incorporating one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, in a membrane-control system.
  • Such devices comprise a rate-controlling membrane enclosing an antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist reservoir. Following oral administration the membrane gradually becomes permeable to aqueous fluids, but does not erode or swell.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist reservoir may be composed of a conventional tablet, or a microparticle pellet containing multiple units that do not swell following contact with aqueous fluids.
  • the cores dissolve without modifying their internal osmotic pressure, thereby avoiding the risk of membrane rupture, and typically comprise 60:40 mixtures of lactulose: microcrystalline cellulose (w/w).
  • Active drug(s) is/are released through a two-phase process, comprising diffusion of aqueous fluids into the matrix, followed by diffusion of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist out of the matrix.
  • Multiple-unit membrane-controlled systems typically comprise more than one discrete unit.
  • spherical beads can contain discrete spherical beads individually coated with rate-controlling membrane and may be encapsulated in a hard gelatin shell (examples of such preparations include Contac 400; Martindale 33rd Ed., 1790.1 and Feospan; Martindale 33rd Ed., p.1859.4).
  • multiple-unit membrane-controlled systems may be compressed into a tablet (for example, Suscard; Martindale 33rd Ed., p.2115.1).
  • Alternative implementations of this technology include devices in which the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is coated around inert sugar spheres, and devices prepared by extrusion spheronization employing a conventional matrix system.
  • a sustained release dosage form of one or more compounds and formulations of the invention is a matrix formation, such a matrix formation taking the form of film coated spheroids containing as active ingredient one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators and a non water-soluble spheronising agent.
  • spheroid is known in the pharmaceutical art and means spherical granules having a diameter usually of between 0.01 mm and 4 mm.
  • the spheronising agent may be any pharmaceutically acceptable material that, together with the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, can be spheronised to form spheroids.
  • Microcrystalline cellulose is preferred. Suitable microcrystalline cellulose includes, for example, the material sold as Avicel PH 101 (Trade Mark, FMC Corporation).
  • the film-coated spheroids may contain between 70% and 99% (by wt), especially between 80% and 95% (by wt), of the spheronising agent, especially microcrystalline cellulose.
  • the spheroids may also contain a binder.
  • Suitable binders such as low viscosity, water soluble polymers, will be well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical art.
  • a suitable binder is, in particular polyvinylpyrrolidone in various degrees of polymerization.
  • water-soluble hydroxy lower alkyl celluloses such as hydroxy propyl cellulose, are preferred.
  • the spheroids may contain a water insoluble polymer, especially an acrylic polymer, an acrylic copolymer, such as a methacrylic acid-ethyl acrylate copolymer, or ethyl cellulose.
  • thickening agents or binders include: the lipid type, among which are vegetable oils (cotton seed, sesame and groundnut oils) and derivatives of these oils (hydrogenated oils such as hydrogenated castor oil, glycerol behenate, the waxy type such as natural carnauba wax or natural beeswax, synthetic waxes such as cetyl ester waxes, the amphiphilic type such as polymers of ethylene oxide (polyoxyethylene glycol of high molecular weight between 4000 and 100000) or propylene and ethylene oxide copolymers (poloxamers), the cellulosic type (semisynthetic derivatives of cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose, of high molecular weight and high viscosity, gum) or any other polysaccharide such as alginic acid, the polymeric type such as acrylic acid polymers (such as carbomers), and the mineral type such as colloidal silica and bentonite.
  • Suitable diluents for the antihypertensive agent(s) / copper antagonist(s) in the pellets, spheroids or core are, e.g., microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, dicalcium phosphate, calcium carbonate, calcium sulphate, sucrose, dextrates, dextrin, dextrose, dicalcium phosphate dihydrate, kaolin, magnesium carbonate, magnesium oxide, maltodextrin, cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose, sorbitol, starches, pregelatinized starch, talc, tricalcium phosphate and lactose.
  • Suitable lubricants are e.g., magnesium stearate and sodium stearyl fumarate.
  • Suitable binding agents include, e.g., hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, polyvidone, and methylcellulose.
  • Suitable binders that may be included are: gum arabic, gum tragacanth, guar gum, alginic acid, sodium alginate, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, dextrin, gelatin, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, liquid glucose, magnesium and aluminum.
  • Suitable disintegrating agents are starch, sodium starch glycolate, crospovidone and croscarmalose sodium.
  • Suitable surface active are Poloxamer 188®, polysorbate 80 and sodium lauryl sulfate.
  • Suitable flow aids are talc colloidal anhydrous silica.
  • Suitable lubricants that may be used are glidants (such as anhydrous silicate, magnesium trisilicate, magnesium silicate, cellulose, starch, talc or tricalcium phosphate) or alternatively antifriction agents (such as calcium stearate, hydrogenated vegetable oils, paraffin, magnesium stearate, polyethylene glycol, sodium benzoate, sodium lauryl sulphate, fumaric acid, stearic acid or zinc stearate and talc).
  • Suitable water-soluble polymers are PEG with molecular weights in the range 1000 to 6000.
  • Delayed release of the composition or formulation of the invention may be achieved through the use of a tablet, pellet, spheroid or core itself, which besides having a filler and binder, other ancillary substances, in particular lubricants and nonstick agents, and disintegrants.
  • lubricants and nonstick agents are higher fatty acids and their alkali metal and alkaline-earth-metal salts, such as calcium stearate.
  • Suitable disintegrants are, in particular, chemically inert agents, for example, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked sodium carboxymethylcelluloses, and sodium starch glycolate.
  • Yet further embodiments of the invention include formulations of one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, incorporated into transdermal drug delivery systems, such as those described in: Transdermal Drug Delivery Systems, Chapter 10. In: Ansel, H. C, Allen, L. V. and Popovich, N. G. Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, 7th Ed., Lippincott 1999, pp. 263 - 278). Transdermal drug delivery systems facilitate the passage of therapeutic quantities of drug substances through the skin and into the systemic circulation to exert systemic effects, as originally described (see Stoughton, R. D. Percutaneous absorption, Toxicol Appl Pharmacol 7:1-8 (1965)).
  • Methods known to enhance the delivery of drugs by the percutaneous route include chemical skin penetration enhancers, which increase skin permeability by reversibly damaging or otherwise altering the physicochemical nature of the stratum corneum to decrease its resistance to drug diffusion (see Shah, V., Peck, CC, and Williams, R.L., Skin penetration enhancement: clinical pharmacological and regulatory considerations, In: Walters, K.A. and Hadgraft, J. (Eds.) Pharmaceutical skin penetration enhancement. New York: Dekker, 1993).
  • Skin penetration enhancers suitable for formulation with antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in transdermal drug delivery systems may be chosen from the following list: acetone, laurocapram, dimethylacetamide, dimethylformamide, dimethylsulphoxide, ethanol, oleic acid, polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol and sodium lauryl sulphate.
  • Iontophoresis involves the delivery of charged chemical compounds across the skin membrane using an applied electrical field. Such methods have proven suitable for delivery of a number of drugs.
  • another embodiment of the invention comprises one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, formulated in such a manner suitable for administration by iontophoresis or sonophoresis.
  • Formulations suitable for administration by iontophoresis or sonophoresis may be in the form of gels, creams, or lotions.
  • Transdermal delivery may utilize, among others, monolithic delivery systems, drug-impregnated adhesive delivery systems (e.g., the LatitudeTM drug- in-adhesive system from 3M), active transport devices and membrane- controlled systems.
  • Monolithic systems of the invention incorporate an antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist matrix, comprising a polymeric material in which the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is dispersed between backing and frontal layers.
  • Drug impregnated adhesive delivery systems comprise an adhesive polymer in which one or more compositions and formulations of the invention and any excipients are incorporated into the adhesive polymer.
  • Active transport devices incorporate an antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist reservoir, often in liquid or gel form, a membrane that may be rate controlling, and a driving force to propel the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist across the membrane.
  • Membrane-controlled transdermal systems of the invention comprise an antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist reservoir(s), often in liquid or gel form, a membrane that may be rate controlling and backing, adhesive and/or protecting layers.
  • Transdermal delivery dosage forms of the invention include those which substitute the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, for the diclofenic or other pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof referred to in the transdermal delivery systems disclosed in, by way of example, U.S. Patent Nos. 6,193,996, and 6,262,121.
  • Formulations and/or compositions for topical administration of one or more compositions and formulations of the invention ingredient can be prepared as an admixture or other pharmaceutical formulation to be applied in a wide variety of ways including, but are not limited to, lotions, creams gels, sticks, sprays, ointments and pastes. These product types may comprise several types of formulations including, but not limited to solutions, emulsions, gels, solids, and liposomes. If the topical composition of the invention is formulated as an aerosol and applied to the skin as a spray-on, a propellant may be added to a solution composition. Suitable propellants as used in the art can be utilized.
  • topical administration of an active agent reference is made to U.S. Patent Nos.
  • compositions in accordance with the present invention are any variants of the oral dosage forms that are adapted for suppository or other parenteral use.
  • these compositions may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds and formulations of the invention with a suitable non-irritating excipient, such as cocoa butter, synthetic glyceride esters or polyethylene glycols, which are solid at ordinary temperatures, but liquify and/or dissolve in the rectal cavity to release the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist.
  • a suitable non-irritating excipient such as cocoa butter, synthetic glyceride esters or polyethylene glycols, which are solid at ordinary temperatures, but liquify and/or dissolve in the rectal cavity to release the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist.
  • Suppositories are generally solid dosage forms intended for insertion into body orifices including rectal, vaginal and occasionally urethrally and can be long acting or slow release.
  • Suppositories include a base that can include, but is not limited to, materials such as alginic acid, which will prolong the release of the pharmaceutically acceptable active ingredient over several hours (5-7).
  • bases can be characterized into two main categories and a third miscellaneous group: 1) fatty or oleaginous bases, 2) water-soluble or water-miscible bases and 3) miscellaneous bases, generally combinations of lipophilic and hydrophilic substances.
  • Fatty or oleaginous bases include hydrogenated fatty acids of vegetable oils such as palm kernel oil and cottonseed oil, fat-based compound containing compounds of glycerin with the higher molecular weight fatty acids such as palmitic and stearic acids, cocoa butter is also used where phenol and chloral hydrate lower the melting point of cocoa butter when incorporated, solidifying agents like cetyl esters wax (about 20%) or beeswax
  • bases include other commercial products such as Fattibase (triglycerides from palm, palm kernel and coconut oils with self-emulsifying glycerol monostearate and poloxyl stearate), Wecobee and Witepsol bases.
  • Water-soluble bases are generally glycerinated gelatin and water-miscible bases are generally polyethylene glycols.
  • the miscellaneous bases include mixtures of the oleaginous and water-soluble or water- miscible materials.
  • An example of such a base in this group is polyoxyl 40 stearate and polyoxyethylene diols and the free glycols.
  • Transmucosal administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention may utilize any mucosal membrane but commonly utilizes the nasal, buccal, vaginal and rectal tissues.
  • Formulations suitable for nasal administration of the compounds and formulations of the invention may be administered in a liquid form, for example, nasal spray, nasal drops, or by aerosol administration by nebulizer, including aqueous or oily solutions of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist.
  • Formulations for nasal administration, wherein the carrier is a solid include a coarse powder having a particle size, for example, of less than about 100 microns, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day than about 50 microns, which is administered in the manner in which snuff is taken, i.e., by rapid inhalation through the nasal passage from a container of the powder held close up to the nose.
  • compositions in solution may be nebulized by the use of inert gases and such nebulized solutions may be breathed directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a facemask, tent or intermittent positive-pressure breathing machine.
  • Solutions, suspensions or powder compositions of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist may be administered orally or nasally from devices that deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
  • Formulations of the invention may be prepared as aqueous solutions for example in saline, solutions employing benzyl alcohol or other suitable preservatives, absorption promoters to enhance bio- availability, fluorocarbons, and/or other solubilising or dispersing agents known in the art.
  • the invention provides extended-release formulations containing one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, for parenteral administration.
  • Extended rates of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist action following injection may be achieved in a number of ways, including the following: crystal or amorphous antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist forms having prolonged dissolution characteristics; slowly dissolving chemical complexes of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist formulation; solutions or suspensions of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in slowly absorbed carriers or vehicles (as oleaginous); increased particle size of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in suspension; or, by injection of slowly eroding microspheres of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist (for example, see: Friess, W., Lee, G.
  • compositions of the invention can be formulated into a pharmaceutical composition suitable for administration to a patient. See, e.g., Examples 1-36 herein, regarding oral tablets and capsules.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist can be provided and administered in forms suitable for once-a-day dosing.
  • An acetate, phosphate, citrate or glutamate buffer may be added allowing a pH of the final composition to be from about 5.0 to about 9.5; optionally a carbohydrate or polyhydric alcohol tonicif ⁇ er and, a preservative selected from the group consisting of m-cresol, benzyl alcohol, methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl parabens and phenol may also be added.
  • Water for injection, tonicifying agents such as sodium chloride, as well as other excipients, may also be present, if desired.
  • buffer for parenteral administration, formulations are isotonic or substantially isotonic to avoid irritation and pain at the site of administration.
  • the terms buffer, buffer solution and buffered solution when used with reference to hydrogen-ion concentration or pH, refer to the ability of a system, particularly an aqueous solution, to resist a change of pH on adding acid or alkali, or on dilution with a solvent. Characteristic of buffered solutions, which undergo small changes of pH on addition of acid or base, is the presence either of a weak acid and a salt of the weak acid, or a weak base and a salt of the weak base. An example of the former system is acetic acid and sodium acetate. The change of pH is slight as long as the amount of hydroxyl ion added does not exceed the capacity of the buffer system to neutralize it.
  • Maintaining the pH of the formulation in the range of approximately 5.0 to 9.5 can enhance the stability of the parenteral formulation of the present invention.
  • Other pH ranges include, 5.5 to 9.0, or 6.0 to 8.5, or 6.5 to 8.0, or 7.0 to 7.5.
  • the buffer used in the practice of the present invention is selected from any of the following, for example, an acetate buffer, a phosphate buffer or glutamate buffer, the most preferred buffer being a phosphate buffer.
  • Carriers or excipients can also be used to facilitate administration of the compositions and formulations of the invention.
  • carriers and excipients include calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars such as lactose, glucose, or sucrose, or types of starch, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, polyethylene glycols and physiologically compatible solvents.
  • a stabilizer may be included in the formulations of the invention, but will generally not be needed. If included, however, a stabilizer useful in the practice of the invention is a carbohydrate or a polyhydric alcohol.
  • the polyhydric alcohols include such compounds as sorbitol, mannitol, glycerol, xylitol, and polypropylene/ethylene glycol copolymer, as well as various polyethylene glycols (PEG) of molecular weight 200, 400, 1450, 3350, 4000, 6000, and 8000).
  • the carbohydrates include, for example, mannose, ribose, trehalose, maltose, inositol, lactose, galactose, arabinose, or lactose.
  • USP United States Pharmacopeia
  • anti-microbial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations must be added to preparations contained in multiple dose containers. They must be present in adequate concentration at the time of use to prevent the multiplication of microorganisms inadvertently introduced into the preparation while withdrawing a portion of the contents with a hypodermic needle and syringe, or using other invasive means for delivery, such as pen injectors.
  • Antimicrobial agents should be evaluated to ensure compatibility with all other components of the formula, and their activity should be evaluated in the total formula to ensure that a particular agent that is effective in one formulation is not ineffective in another. It is not uncommon to find that a particular agent will be effective in one formulation but not effective in another formulation.
  • a preservative is, in the common pharmaceutical sense, a substance that prevents or inhibits microbial growth and may be added to a pharmaceutical formulation for this purpose to avoid consequent spoilage of the formulation by microorganisms. While the amount of the preservative is not great, it may nevertheless affect the overall stability of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist.
  • the preservative for use in the practice of the invention can range from 0.005 to 1.0% (w/v), the preferred range for each preservative, alone or in combination with others, is: benzyl alcohol (0.1-1.0%), or m-cresol (0.1-0.6%), or phenol (0.1- 0.8%) or combination of methyl (0.05-0.25%) and ethyl or propyl or butyl (0.005%- 0.03%) parabens.
  • the parabens are lower alkyl esters of para-hydroxybenzoic acid.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist may be administered parenterally (including subcutaneous injections, intravenous, intramuscular, intradermal injection or infusion techniques) or by inhalation spray in dosage unit formulations containing conventional non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable earners, adjuvants and vehicles.
  • the parenteral formulation may be thickened with a thickening agent such as a methylcellulose.
  • the formulation may be prepared in an emulsified form, either water in oil or oil in water. Any of a wide variety of pharmaceutically acceptable emulsifying agents may be employed including, for example, acacia powder, a non- ionic surfactant or an ionic surfactant.
  • aqueous suspensions such as synthetic and natural gums, e.g., tragacanth, acacia, alginate, dextran, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, polyvinyl-pyrrolidone or gelatin. It is possible that other ingredients may be present in the parenteral pharmaceutical formulation of the invention.
  • Such additional ingredients may include wetting agents, oils (e.g., a vegetable oil such as sesame, peanut or olive), analgesic agents, emulsifiers, antioxidants, bulking agents, tonicity modifiers, metal ions, oleaginous vehicles, proteins (e.g., human serum albumin, gelatin or proteins) and a zwitterion (e.g., an amino acid such as betaine, taurine, arginine, glycine, lysine and histidine).
  • oils e.g., a vegetable oil such as sesame, peanut or olive
  • analgesic agents emulsifiers, antioxidants, bulking agents, tonicity modifiers, metal ions, oleaginous vehicles
  • proteins e.g., human serum albumin, gelatin or proteins
  • a zwitterion e.g., an amino acid such as betaine, taurine, arginine, glycine, lysine and histidine.
  • a container is based on a consideration of the composition of the container, as well as of the ingredients, and the treatment to which it will be subjected.
  • pharmaceutical formulations see also, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms: Parenteral Medications, Vol. 1, 2nd ed., Avis et al., Eds., Mercel Dekker, New York, N. Y. 1992.
  • Suitable routes of parenteral administration include intramuscular, intravenous, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, subdermal, intradermal, intraarticular, intrathecal and the like. Mucosal delivery is also permissible.
  • the dose and dosage regimen will depend upon the weight and health of the subject.
  • the rate and duration of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist delivery may be controlled by, for example by using mechanically controlled drug infusion pumps.
  • the antihypertensive agent(s) / copper antagonist(s), such as, for example, a copper chelator(s), can be administered in the form of a depot injection that may be formulated in such a manner as to permit a sustained release of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist can be compressed into pellets or small cylinders and implanted subcutaneously or intramuscularly.
  • the pellets or cylinders may additionally be coated with a suitable biodegradable polymer chosen so as to provide a desired release profile.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist may alternatively be micropelleted.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist micropellets using bioacceptable polymers can be designed to allow release rates to be manipulated to provide a desired release profile.
  • injectable depot forms can be made by forming microencapsulated matrices of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide.
  • biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide.
  • the rate of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release can be controlled.
  • examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(orthoesters) and poly (anhydrides).
  • Depot injectable formulations can also be prepared by entrapping the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in liposomes, examples of which include unilamellar vesicles, large unilamellar vesicles and multilamellar vesicles. Liposomes can be formed from a variety of phospholipids, such as cholesterol, stearyl amine or phosphatidylcholines. Depot injectable formulations can also be prepared by entrapping the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in microemulsions that are compatible with body tissue. By way of example reference is made to U.S. Patent Nos. 6,410,041 and 6,362,190.
  • Implantable infusion devices may employ inert material such as biodegradable polymers listed above or synthetic silicones, for example, cylastic, silicone rubber or other polymers manufactured by the Dow-Corning Corporation.
  • the polymer may be loaded with antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist and any excipients.
  • Implantable infusion devices may also comprise a coating of, or a portion of, a medical device wherein the coating comprises the polymer loaded with antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist and any excipient.
  • Such an implantable infusion device may be prepared as disclosed in U.S. Patent No.
  • An implantable infusion device may also be prepared by the in situ formation of an antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist containing solid matrix as disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 6,120,789, herein incorporated in its entirety.
  • Implantable infusion devices may be passive or active.
  • An active implantable infusion device may comprise a antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist reservoir, a means of allowing the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist to exit the reservoir, for example a permeable membrane, and a driving force to propel the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist from the reservoir.
  • Such an active implantable infusion device may additionally be activated by an extrinsic signal, such as that disclosed in WO 02/45779, wherein the implantable infusion device comprises a system configured to deliver the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist comprising an external activation unit operable by a user to request activation of the implantable infusion device, including a controller to reject such a request prior to the expiration of a lockout interval.
  • an active implantable infusion device include implantable drug pumps.
  • Implantable drug pumps include, for example, miniature, computerized, programmable, refillable drug delivery systems with an attached catheter that inserts into a target organ system, usually the spinal cord or a vessel. See Medtronic Inc.
  • Implantable drug infusion pumps are indicated for long-term intrathecal infusion of morphine sulfate for the treatment of chronic intractable pain; intravascular infusion of floxuridine for treatment of primary or metastatic cancer; intrathecal injection (baclofen injection) for severe spasticity; long-term epidural infusion of morphine sulfate for treatment of chronic intractable pain; long-term intravascular infusion of doxorubicin, cisplatin, or methotrexate for the treatment or metastatic cancer; and long-term intravenous infusion of clindamycin for the treatment of osteomyelitis.
  • Such pumps may also be used for the long-term infusion of one or more antihypertensive agent / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, at a desired amount for a desired number of doses or steady state administration.
  • One form of a typical implantable drug infusion pump (Synchromed EL programmable pump; Medtronic) is titanium covered and roughly disk shaped, measures 85.2 mm in diameter and 22.86 mm in thickness, weighs 185 g, has a drug reservoir of 10 mL, and runs on a lithium thionyl-chloride battery with a 6- to 7-year life, depending on use.
  • the downloadable memory contains programmed drug delivery parameters and calculated amount of drug remaining, which can be compared with actual amount of drug remaining to access accuracy of pump function, but actual pump function over time is not recorded.
  • the pump is usually implanted in the right or left abdominal wall.
  • Other pumps useful in the invention include, for example, portable disposable infuser pumps (PDIPs).
  • PDIPs portable disposable infuser pumps
  • implantable infusion devices may employ liposome delivery systems, such as a small unilamellar vesicles, large unilamellar vesicles, and multilamellar vesicles can be formed from a variety of phospholipids, such as cholesterol, stearyl amine or phosphatidylcholines.
  • the invention also includes delayed-release ocular preparations containing one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators.
  • One of the problems associated with the use of ophthalmic solutions is the rapid loss of administered drug due to blinking of the eye and the flushing effect of lacrimal fluids. Up to 80% of an administered dose may be lost through tears and the action of nasolacrimal drainage within 5 minutes of installation. Extended periods of therapy may be achieved by formulations of the invention that increase the contact time between the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist and the corneal surface.
  • ophthalmic suspensions in which the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist particles slowly dissolve by slowly dissipating ophthalmic ointments; or by use of ophthalmic inserts.
  • Preparations of one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists, for example, one or more copper chelators, suitable for ocular administration to humans may be formulated using synthetic high molecular weight cross-linked polymers such as those of acrylic acid (e.g., Carbopol 940) or gellan gum (Gelrite; see, Merck Index 12th Ed., 4389), a compound that forms a gel upon contact with the precorneal tear film (e.g.
  • ophthalmic inserts such as the OCUSERT system (Alza Inc.).
  • OCUSERT system Alza Inc.
  • inserts are elliptical with dimensions of about 13.4 mm by 5.4 mm by 0.3 mm (thickness).
  • the insert is flexible and has an antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist -containing core surrounded on each side by a layer of hydrophobic ethylene/vinyl acetate copolymer membranes through which the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist diffuses at a constant rate.
  • the white margin around such devices contains white titanium dioxide, an inert compound that confers visibility.
  • the rate of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist diffusion is controlled by the polymer composition, the membrane thickness, and the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist solubility. During the first few hours after insertion, the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist release rate is greater than that which occurs thereafter in order to achieve initially therapeutic antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist levels.
  • the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist -containing inserts may be placed in the conjunctival sac from which they release their medication over a treatment period.
  • Another form of an ophthalmic insert is a rod shaped, water- soluble structure composed of hydroxypropyl cellulose in which antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is embedded.
  • the insert is placed into the inferior cul-de- sac of the eye once or twice daily as required for therapeutic efficacy.
  • the inserts soften and slowly dissolve, releasing the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist that is then taken up by the ocular fluids.
  • a further example of such a device is that furnished by Lacrisert (Merck Inc.).
  • the invention also provides in part dose delivery formulations and devices formulated to enhance bioavailability of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist. This may be in addition to or in combination with any of the formulations or devices described above.
  • one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists such as a copper chelator, for example, trientine, may be poorly absorbed in the digestive tract.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist is an amount capable of providing an appropriate level of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist in the bloodstream.
  • a therapeutically effective level of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist may be achieved by administering lower dosages than would otherwise be necessary.
  • An increase in bioavailability of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist may be achieved by complexation of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist with one or more bioavailability or absorption enhancing agents or in bioavailability or absorption enhancing formulations.
  • the invention in part provides for the formulation of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, e.g., copper chelator, with other agents useful to enhance bioavailability or absorption.
  • Such bioavailability or absorption enhancing agents include, but are not limited to, various surfactants such as various triglycerides, such as from butter oil, monoglycerides, such as of stearic acid and vegetable oils, esters thereof, esters of fatty acids, propylene glycol esters, the polysorbates, sodium lauryl sulfate, sorbitan esters, sodium sulfosuccinate, among other compounds.
  • various surfactants such as various triglycerides, such as from butter oil, monoglycerides, such as of stearic acid and vegetable oils, esters thereof, esters of fatty acids, propylene glycol esters, the polysorbates, sodium lauryl sulfate, sorbitan esters, sodium sulfosuccinate, among other compounds.
  • cyclodextrins may stabilize (both thermally and oxidatively), reduce the volatility of, and alter the solubility of, antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist with which they are complexed.
  • Cyclodextrins are cyclic molecules composed of glucopyranose ring units that form toroidal structures. The interior of the cyclodextrin molecule is hydrophobic and the exterior is hydrophilic, making the cyclodextrin molecule water-soluble.
  • the degree of solubility can be altered through substitution of the hydroxyl groups on the exterior of the cyclodextrin.
  • the hydrophobicity of the interior can be altered through substitution, though generally the hydrophobic nature of the interior allows accommodation of relatively hydrophobic guests within the cavity.
  • Accommodation of one molecule within another is known as complexation and the resulting product is referred to as an inclusion complex.
  • cyclodextrin derivatives include sulfobutylcyclodexti ⁇ n, maltosylcyclodextrin, hydroxypropylcyclodextrin, and salts thereof.
  • Complexation of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist with a carrier molecule such as cyclodextrin to form an inclusion complex may thereby reduce the size of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist dose needed for therapeutic efficacy by enhancing the bioavailability of the administered active agent.
  • the invention in part also provides for the formulation of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, e.g., copper chelator, in a microemulsion to enhance bioavailability.
  • a microemulsion is a fluid and stable homogeneous solution composed of four major constituents, respectively, a hydrophilic phase, a lipophilic phase, at least one surfactant (SA) and at least one cosurfactant (CoSA).
  • SA surfactant
  • CoSA cosurfactant
  • a surfactant is a chemical compound possessing two groups, the first polar or ionic, which has a great affinity for water, the second which contains a longer or shorter aliphatic chain and is hydrophobic. These chemical compounds having marked hydrophilic character are intended to cause the formation of micelles in aqueous or oily solution.
  • Suitable surfactants include mono-, di- and triglycerides and polyethylene glycol (PEG) mono- and diesters.
  • a cosurfactant also sometimes known as "co-surface-active agent", is a chemical compound having hydrophobic character, intended to cause the mutual solubilization of the aqueous and oily phases in a microemulsion.
  • suitable co-surfactants include ethyl diglycol, lauric esters of propylene glycol, oleic esters of polyglycerol, and related compounds.
  • the invention in part also provides for the formulation of antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists with various polymers to enhance bioavailability by increasing adhesion to mucosal surfaces, by decreasing the rate of degradation by hydrolysis or enzymatic degradation of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, and by increasing the surface area of the antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist relative to the size of the particle.
  • Suitable polymers can be natural or synthetic, and can be biodegradable or non-biodegradable. Delivery of low molecular weight active agents, such as for example antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist, including compounds of Formulae I, I(a) and II and trientine active agents, may occur by either diffusion or degredation of the polymeric system.
  • Representative natural polymers include proteins such as zein, modified zein, casein, gelatin, gluten, serum albumin, and collagen, polysaccharides such as cellulose, dextrans, and polyhyaluronic acid. Synthetic polymers are generally preferred due to the better characterization of degradation and release profiles.
  • Representative synthetic polymers include polyphosphazenes, poly(vinyl alcohols), polyamides, polycarbonates, polyacrylates, polyalkylenes, polyacrylamides, polyalkylene glycols, polyalkylene oxides, polyalkylene terephthalates, polyvinyl ethers, polyvinyl esters, polyvinyl halides, polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and copolymers thereof.
  • polyacrylates examples include poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(ethyl methacrylate), poly(butyl methacrylate), poly(isobutyl methacrylate), poly(hexyl methacrylate), poly(isodecyl methacrylate), poly(lauryl methacrylate), poly(phenyl methacrylate), poly(methyl acrylate), poly(isopropyl acrylate), poly(isobutyl acrylate) and poly(octadecyl acrylate).
  • Synthetically modified natural polymers include cellulose derivatives such as alkyl celluloses, hydroxyalkyl celluloses, cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, and nitrocelluloses.
  • Suitable cellulose derivatives include methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxybutyl methyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose propionate, cellulose acetate butyrate, cellulose acetate phthalate, carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose triacetate and cellulose sulfate sodium salt.
  • polymers described above can be obtained from commercial sources such as Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis, Mo., Polysciences, Warrenton, Pa., Aldrich Chemical Co., Milwaukee, Wis., Fluka, Ronkonkoma, N.
  • polymers described above can be separately characterized as biodegradable, non-biodegradable, and bioadhesive polymers, as discussed in more detail below.
  • Representative synthetic degradable polymers include polyhydroxy acids such as polylactides, polyglycolides and copolymers thereof, poly(ethylene terephthalate), poly(butic acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co- caprolactone), polyanhydrides, polyorthoesters and blends and copolymers thereof.
  • Representative natural biodegradable polymers include polysaccharides such as alginate, dextran, cellulose, collagen, and chemical derivatives thereof (substitutions, additions of chemical groups, for example, alkyl, alkylene, hydroxylations, oxidations, and other modifications routinely made by those skilled in the art), and proteins such as albumin, zein and copolymers and blends thereof, alone or in combination with synthetic polymers. In general, these materials degrade either by enzymatic hydrolysis or exposure to water in vivo, by surface or bulk erosion.
  • non-biodegradable polymers examples include ethylene vinyl acetate, poly(meth)acrylic acid, polyamides, polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylphenol, and copolymers and mixtures thereof.
  • Hydrophilic polymers and hydrogels tend to have bioadhesive properties.
  • Hydrophilic polymers that contain carboxylic groups e.g., poly[acrylic acid]
  • Polymers with the highest concentrations of carboxylic groups are preferred when bioadhesiveness on soft tissues is desired.
  • Various cellulose derivatives, such as sodium alginate, carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxymethylcellulose and methylcellulose also have bioadhesive properties.
  • bioadhesive materials are water-soluble, while others are hydrogels.
  • Polymers such as hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate succinate (HPMCAS), cellulose acetate trimellitate (CAT), cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP), hydroxypropylcellulose acetate phthalate (HPCAP), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate phthalate (HPMCAP), and methylcellulose acetate phthalate (MCAP) may be utilized to enhance the bioavailability of antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist with which they are complexed.
  • HPMCAS hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate succinate
  • CAT cellulose acetate trimellitate
  • CAP cellulose acetate phthalate
  • HPCAP hydroxypropylcellulose acetate phthalate
  • HPMCAP hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate phthalate
  • MCAP methylcellulose acetate phthalate
  • Rapidly bioerodible polymers such as poly(lactide-co-glycolide), polyanhydrides, and polyorthoesters, whose carboxylic groups are exposed on the external surface as their smooth surface erodes, can also be used for bioadhesive antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist delivery systems.
  • polymers containing labile bonds such as polyanhydrides and polyesters, are well known for their hydrolytic reactivity. Their hydrolytic degradation rates can generally be altered by simple changes in the polymer backbone. Upon degradation, these materials also expose carboxylic groups on their external surface, and accordingly, these can also be used for bioadhesive antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist delivery systems.
  • agents that may enhance bioavailability or absorption of one or more antihypertensive agents / copper antagonists can act by facilitating or inhibiting transport across the intestinal mucosa.
  • agents that increase blood flow such as vasodilators, may increase the rate of absorption of orally administered antihypertensive agent / copper antagonist by increasing the blood flow to the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Vasodilators have been used in combination with other drugs.
  • a coronary vasodilator diltiazem
  • drugs which have an absolute bioavailability of not more than 20%, such as adrenergic beta-blocking agents (e.g., propranolol), catecholamines (e.g., dopamine), benzodiazepine derivatives (e.g., diazepam), vasodilators (e.g., isosorbide dinitrate, nitroglycerin or amyl nitrite), cardiotonics or antidiabetic agents, bronchodilators (e.g., tetrahydroisoquinoline), hemostatics (e.g., carbazochrome sulfonic acid), antispasmodics (e.g., timepidium halide) and antitussives (e.g., tipepidine).
  • Vasodilators therefore constitute another class
  • compositions and formulations of the invention include the inhibition of reverse active transport mechanisms.
  • one of the active transport mechanisms present in the intestinal epithelial cells is p-glycoprotein transport mechanism which facilitates the reverse transport of substances, which have diffused or have been transported inside the epithelial cell, back into the lumen of the intestine.
  • the p-glycoprotein present in the intestinal epithelial cells may function as a protective reverse pump which prevents toxic substances which have been ingested and diffused or transported into the epithelial cell from being absorbed into the circulatory system and becoming bioavailable.
  • the p-glycoprotein in the intestinal cell can also function to prevent bioavailability of substances which are beneficial, such as certain drugs which happen to be substrates for the p- glycoprotein reverse transport system. Inhibition of this p-glycoprotein mediated active transport system will cause less drug to be transported back into the lumen and will thus increase the net drug transport across the gut epithelium and will increase the amount of drug ultimately available in the blood.
  • p- glycoprotein inhibitors are well known and appreciated in the art.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by compaction and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by compaction and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, are provided in the below table:
  • the following process employs compaction and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA).
  • the compacted antagonist(s) is/are then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company, Elmhurst, 111.) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillator mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the milled copper antagonist(s) is/are blended with a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist (e.g., carvedilol), silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate, for example, in a suitable blender.
  • Suitable blenders include v-Blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp., Troy OH.).
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets using a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press (Manesty, Knowsley, Merseyside, UK).
  • a suitable tablet machine such as a Manesty beta-press (Manesty, Knowsley, Merseyside, UK).
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg, 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets including fillers and having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by blending and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by blending and direct compression.
  • copper chelators e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists e.g.
  • ingredients for tablets with fillers including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, are provided in the below table.
  • the following process employs a combination of blending and direct compression techniques.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist e.g., carvedilol
  • suitable blenders include, for example, V-Blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp).
  • the resulting blend is mixed with microcrystalline cellulose, which may also be done in a suitable blender.
  • This blend is milled and screened in a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Corp) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • a Fitz mill Frazier Corp
  • suitable mill such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the resulting blend is mixed with the silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, and magnesium stearate, which may also be accomplished in a suitable blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg, 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared by direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared by direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenete
  • ingredients for tablets with desiccant(s) including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, are provided in the below table.
  • the following process employs compaction, blending and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta- 1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s) e.g., carvedilol
  • a desiccant e.g. anhydrous sodium phosphate
  • suitable blenders include, for example, v-blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart).
  • This blend is compacted in a suitable roller compacter, such as a Vector Mini-model TF. It is then milled and screened in a Fitz mill or other suitable mill. Suitable mills include a Quadro Comill, oscillating mills, and pin mills, for example. The resulting blend is blended with a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist (e.g. carvedilol), silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate in a suitable blender.
  • a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist e.g. carvedilol
  • the final blend is compacted into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg, 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists ⁇ e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by wet granulation.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists ⁇ e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by wet granulation.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • ingredients for tablets with wet granulation binder(s) and including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, are provided in the below table.
  • the following tablet is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s) e.g., carvedilol
  • lactose lactose
  • dicalcium phosphate in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in the suitable granulator/dryer.
  • the wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and dicalcium phosphate and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This final granulation is mixed with the crosscarmellose sodium and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • a suitable blender such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg, 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 5 A COMBINATION TABLET EMPLOYING A WET GRANULATION AND A DESICCANT
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists ⁇ e.g., carvedilol), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared by wet granulation.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists e.g., carvedilol
  • ingredients for tablets with a desiccant(s) and including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, which may be prepared using wet granulation methods, are provided in the below table.
  • the following tablet is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s) e.g., carvedilol
  • lactose in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability
  • the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in a suitable granulator/dryer.
  • the wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and dicalcium phosphate and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in, for example, a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This granulation is mixed with the disodium phosphate and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg, 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of capsules having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by compaction and direct filling.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by compaction and direct filling.
  • copper chelators e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists e.g.,
  • ingredients for capsules including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, that may be prepared by direct filling, are provided in the below table.
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA). It is then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company, Elmhurst, 111.) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the milled copper antagonist is blended with the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist (e.g., carvedilol), silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender.
  • Suitable blenders include, for example, v-Blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp., Troy OH.).
  • the final blend is filled into hard gelatin capsules with on a suitable encapsulation machine, such as a Zanasi 40 E capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of capsules to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more capsules once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 7 A COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING A DESICCANT AND DIRECT FILLING
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists ⁇ e.g., carvedilol), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared by compaction and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists e.g., carvedilol
  • ingredients for capsules with a desiccant(s) and including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, which may be prepared by direct filling, are provided in the below table.
  • the following process employs compaction, blending and encapsulation.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • a suitable roller compacter include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA). It is then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company, Elmhurst, 111.) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the milled copper antagonist is blended with the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist, disodium phosphate, silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender.
  • suitable blenders include, for example, V-blenders
  • the final blend is encapsulated into hard gelatin capsules on a suitable capsule machine, such as a Zanasi 4OE capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of capsules to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more capsules once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 8 A COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING FILLERS AND DIRECT FILLING This Example describes preparation of capsules having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), together with one or more fillers, which may be prepared by direct filling.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), together with one or more fillers, which may be prepared by direct filling.
  • ingredients for capsules with fillers including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, which may be prepared by direct filling, are provided in the below table.
  • the following process employs a combination of blending and direct encapsulation techniques.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are blended, for example, with a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist (e.g. carvedilol) and lactose in a suitable blender.
  • a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist e.g. carvedilol
  • Suitable blenders include, for example, v-blenders (Patterson-Kelly), and planetary blenders (Hobart Corp).
  • the resulting blend is mixed with the crosscarmellose sodium in the same blender.
  • This blend may be milled and screened in a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Corp) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the resulting blend is mixed with the magnesium stearate, or other lubricant, which may also be accomplished in a suitable blender.
  • the final blend is filled into hard gelatin capsules on a suitable encapsulation machine, such as a Zanasi capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of capsules to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more capsules once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • a COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING WET GRANULATION This Example describes preparation of capsules having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared by wet granulation methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists e.g., carvedilol
  • ingredients for capsules including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, that may be prepared by wet granulation, are provided in the below table.
  • the following capsule is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are blended with a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist (e.g. carvedilol), and lactose and in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in a suitable granulator/dryer.
  • the wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This granulation is mixed with the sodium starch glycolate and magnesium stearate in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and
  • the amount of carvedilol may range from about 1 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used. The amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of capsules to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • a preferred capsule size is 300 mg.
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more capsules once, twice, or more per day. Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 10 COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING A DESICCANT AND WET GRANULATION
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared by wet granulation.
  • copper chelators e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists e.g., carvedilol
  • ingredients for capsules having a desiccant(s) and including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, that may be prepared using wet granulation methods, are provided in the below table.
  • the following capsule is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are blended with a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist (e.g. carvedilol), lactose, and a desiccant (e.g. anhydrous disodium phosphate) in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist e.g. carvedilol
  • lactose e.g. carvedilol
  • a desiccant e.g. anhydrous disodium phosphate
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in a suitable granulator/dryer.
  • the wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and dicalcium phosphate and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This granulation is mixed with the disodium phosphate, crosscarmellose sodium and magnesium stearate in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • a suitable blender such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is filled into hard gelatin capsules in a suitable encapsulation machine, such as a Zanasi 4OE capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 1 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of capsules to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • a preferred capsule size is 300 mg.
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more capsules once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of matrix controlled release tablets having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared using roller compaction and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists (e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared using roller compaction and direct compression.
  • the following process employs compaction and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are first compacted, for example, in a suitable roller compacter.
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA). It is then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company,
  • the milled copper antagonist is/are blended with a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), hydroxypropyl-methylcellulose, and lactose in a suitable blender.
  • suitable blenders include V-Blenders (Patterson-Kelly, and planetary blenders (Hobart Corp., Troy OH.).
  • This blend is blended with the magnesium stearate or other lubricant in the same blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets using a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press (Manesty, Knowsley, Merseyside, UK).
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 3 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 12 A COMBINATION CAPSULE CONTAINING ENTERIC COATED BEADS
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists ⁇ e.g., carvedilol), which may be prepared using granulation, spheronization, and bead coating.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists e.g., carvedilol
  • ingredients for a capsule containing enteric coated beads release and including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol, which may be prepared as set forth herein, are provided in the below table.
  • the copper antagonist(s), a beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist (e.g. carvedilol), and hydroxypropylcellulose are blended in a suitable granulator- spheronizer, such as a Niro Roto-Processor spheronizer. Water or alcohol is used to wet the granulation and the wet mass is spheronized to beads on the processor.
  • a suitable granulator- spheronizer such as a Niro Roto-Processor spheronizer. Water or alcohol is used to wet the granulation and the wet mass is spheronized to beads on the processor.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • the beads are dried in a fluid bed coating/drying processor, such as a Niro Precision coater.
  • the dried beads are coated with the solution and dried in fluid bed coating apparatus.
  • Talc can be added to keep the beads free flowing.
  • the beads are filled into hard gelatin capsules using an appropriate capsule-filling machine, such as a Zanasi encapsulation machine
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonists other than carvedilol.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and carvedilol set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg,
  • 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of carvedilol may range from about 1 mg to about 50 mg (for example, 3.125 mg, 6.25 mg, 12.5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg). Other amounts may also be used. The amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of capsules to be taken per day, whether the beta-1 selective adrenergic antagonist is for heart failure or hypertension, etc. A preferred capsule size is 300 mg. Thus, capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more capsules once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using compaction and direct compression methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using compaction and direct compression methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (
  • ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril, are provided in the below table:
  • the process employs compaction and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are first compacted, for example, in a suitable roller compacter.
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA). It is then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company, Elmhurst, 111.) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillator mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the milled copper antagonist is blended with the enalapril maleate, silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate, for example, in a suitable blender.
  • Suitable blenders include v-Blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp., Troy OH.). The final blend is compressed into tablets using a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press (Manesty, Knowsley, Merseyside, UK).
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared by blending and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared by blending and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.
  • ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril, are provided in the below table:
  • the process employs a combination of blending and direct compression techniques.
  • the copper antagonist is blended, for example, with the enalapril maleate in a suitable blender.
  • suitable blenders include, for example, V-Blenders (Patterson- Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp).
  • the resulting blend is mixed with microcrystalline cellulose, which may also be done in a suitable blender.
  • This blend is milled and screened in a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Corp) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the resulting blend is mixed with the silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate, which may also be accomplished in a suitable blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg, 2 mg, 2.5 mg, 3 mg, 4 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 20 mg, 25 mg, 30 mg, and 40 mg). Other amounts may also be used.
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, and whether the ACE inhibitor is included for treatment or prevention of hypertension, hypertension with renal impairment, heart failure, asymptomatic left ventricular dysfunction, heart failure with renal impairment, and/or hyponatremia.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), and one or more desiccants, which may be prepared using direct compression methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), and one or more desiccants, which may be prepared using direct compression methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril, are provided in the below table:
  • the process employs compaction, blending and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s), enalapril maleate and desiccant(s) are blended in a suitable blender.
  • suitable blenders include, for example, V-blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart).
  • This blend is compacted in a suitable roller compacter, such as a Vector Mini- model TF. It is then milled and screened in a Fitz mill or other suitable mill. Suitable mills include a Quadro Comill, oscillating mills, and pin mills, for example.
  • the resulting blend is blended with the enalapril maleate, silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate in a suitable blender.
  • the final blend is compacted into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drag, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), and one or more granulation binders, which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), and one or more granulation binders, which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • copper chelators e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • ACE inhibitors
  • ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril, are provided in the below table:
  • This tablet is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is blended with one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril maleate), lactose and dicalcium phosphate in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol, and the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in the suitable granulator/dryer. The wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and dicalcium phosphate and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This final granulation is mixed with the crosscarmellose sodium and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • a COMBINATION TABLET EMPLOYING A WET GRANULATION AND A DESICCANT This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • This tablet is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist s) is blended with one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril) and lactose in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol, and the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in a suitable granulator/dryer. The wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and dicalcium phosphate and wet granulating with the hydiOxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in, for example, a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This granulation is mixed with the disodium phosphate and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • a suitable blender such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 18 A COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING DIRECT FILLING This Example describes preparation of capsules having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using compaction and direct filling methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using compaction and direct filling methods.
  • Ingredients for capsules including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril
  • the process employs compaction.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are first compacted, for example, in a suitable roller compacter.
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA). It is then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company, Elmhurst, 111.) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the milled copper antagonist is blended with the enalapril maleate, silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender.
  • Suitable blenders include, for example, v-Blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp., Troy OH.).
  • the final blend is filled into hard gelatin capsules with on a suitable encapsulation machine, such as a Zanasi 40 E capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg)
  • the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg, 2 mg, 2.5 mg, 3 mg, 4 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 20 mg, 25 mg, 30 mg, and 40 mg).
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of capsules to be taken per day, and whether the ACE inhibitor is included for treatment or prevention of hypertension, hypertension with renal impairment, heart failure, asymptomatic left ventricular dysfunction, heart failure with renal impairment, and/or hyponatremia.
  • a preferred capsule size is 300 mg.
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 19 A COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING A DESICCANT AND DIRECT FILLING
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared using compaction and direct compression methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared using compaction and direct compression methods.
  • Ingredients for capsules including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochlor
  • the process employs compaction, blending and encapsulation.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are first compacted, for example, in a suitable roller compacter.
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA). It is then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company, Elmhurst, 111.) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the milled copper antagonist is blended with the enalapril maleate, silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender.
  • Suitable blenders include, for example, V-blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders
  • the final blend is encapsulated into hard gelatin capsules on a suitable capsule machine, such as a Zanasi 4OE capsule machine.
  • a suitable capsule machine such as a Zanasi 4OE capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • a COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING FILLERS AND DIRECT FILLING This Example describes preparation of capsules having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), together with one or more fillers, which may be prepared using direct filling methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), together with one or more fillers, which may be prepared using direct filling methods.
  • ingredients for capsules including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril, are provided in the below table:
  • the process employs a combination of blending and direct encapsulation techniques.
  • the copper antagonist is blended, for example, with the enalapril and lactose in a suitable blender.
  • suitable blenders include, for example, v-blenders (Patterson- Kelly), and planetary blenders (Hobart Corp).
  • the resulting blend is mixed with the crosscarmellose sodium in the same blender. This blend may be milled and screened in a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Corp) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the resulting blend is mixed with the magnesium stearate, or other lubricant, which may also be accomplished in a suitable blender.
  • the final blend is filled into hard gelatin capsules on a suitable encapsulation machine, such as a Zanasi capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 21 A COMBINATION CAPSULE EMPLOYING WET GRANULATION
  • This Example describes preparation of capsules having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • ingredients for capsules including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril, are provided in the below table:
  • This tablet is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is blended with one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril maleate), and lactose and in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol, and the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in a suitable granulator/dryer. The wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in a Glatt fluid bed dryer. This granulation is mixed with the sodium starch glycolate and magnesium stearate in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender. The final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg,
  • enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more capsules once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of capsules having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), together with one or more desiccants, and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), together with one or more desiccants, and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril, are provided in the below table:
  • This capsule is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is blended with one or more ACE inhibitors ⁇ e.g., enalapril maleate) and lactose in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol, and the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in a suitable granulator/dryer. The wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and dicalcium phosphate and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This granulation is mixed with the disodium phosphate, crosscarmellose sodium and magnesium stearate in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is filled into hard gelatin capsules in a suitable encapsulation machine, such as a Zanasi 4OE capsule machine.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg)
  • the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg, 2 mg, 2.5 mg, 3 mg, 4 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 20 mg, 25 mg, 30 mg, and 40 mg).
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of matrix controlled release tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using roller compaction and direct compression methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using roller compaction and direct compression methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more
  • the process employs compaction and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s) is/are first compacted, for example, in a suitable roller compacter.
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA). It is then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Company, Elmhurst, 111.) or other suitable mill, such as a Comill mill, oscillator mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the milled copper antagonist is blended with enalapril maleate, hydroxypropyl- methylcellulose, and lactose in a suitable blender.
  • Suitable blenders include V- Blenders (Patterson-Kelly, and planetary blenders (Hobart Corp., Troy OH.).
  • This blend is blended with the magnesium stearate or other lubricant in the same blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets using a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press (Manesty, Knowsley, Merseyside, UK).
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • a COMBINATION CAPSULE CONTAINING ENTERIC COATED BEADS This Example describes preparation of a capsule containing enteric beads having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using granulation, spheronization, and bead coating methods.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more ACE inhibitors (e.g., enalapril), which may be prepared using granulation, spheronization, and bead coating methods.
  • Ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetra
  • the trientine dihydrochloride, enalapril maleate, and hydroxypropylcellulose are blended in a suitable granulator-spheronizer, such as a Niro Roto-Processor spheronizer. Water or alcohol is used to wet the granulation and the wet mass is spheronized to beads on the processor. The beads are dried in a fluid bed coating/drying processor, such as a Niro Precision coater.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • a commercial aqueous or alcohol solution of cellulose acetate phthalate for example, Aquacote CPD-FMC Corporation, is used to coat the beads in the coating- drying processor.
  • the dried beads are coated with the solution and dried in fluid bed coating apparatus.
  • Talc can be added to keep the beads free flowing.
  • the beads are filled into hard gelatin capsules using an appropriate capsule-filling machine, such as a Zanasi encapsulation machine Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may ACE inhibitors other than enalapril.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and ACE inhibitor(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and enalapril set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about
  • 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 750 mg), and the amount of enalapril may range from about 1 mg to about 40 mg (for example, 1 mg,
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the capsule may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day.
  • Capsules are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), which may be prepared by compaction and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), which may be prepared by compaction and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) such as, for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • ingredients for tablets including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and diltiazem hydrochloride, are provided in the below table:
  • the following process employs compaction and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • Suitable roller compactors include, for example, the Vector Mini-Model TF (Vector Corp., Marion, IA).
  • the compacted antagonist(s) is/are then milled with a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick
  • the milled copper antagonist(s) is/are blended with a calcium channel blocker (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate, for example, in a suitable blender.
  • a calcium channel blocker e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride
  • silicon dioxide e.g., silicon dioxide
  • magnesium stearate e.g., magnesium stearate
  • suitable blenders include v-Blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp., Troy OH.).
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets using a suitable tablet machine, such as a
  • Manesty beta-press Manesty, Knowsley, Merseyside, UK.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may calcium channel blockers other than diltiazem hydrochloride.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and calcium channel blocker(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and diltiazem hydrochloride set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 700 mg), and the amount of diltiazem hydrochloride may range from about 30 mg to about 240 mg (for example, 30 mg, 40 mg, 50 mg, 60 mg, 120 mg, and 240 mg). Other amounts may also be used. The amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the calcium channel blocker is included for treatment or prevention of chest pain and high blood pressure, etc.
  • a preferred capsule size is 300 mg.
  • capsules may be prepared using appropriate doses within the ranges provided in order to yield a 300 mg size.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example, one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets including fillers and having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), which may be prepared by blending and direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators (e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), which may be prepared by blending and direct compression.
  • ingredients for tablets with fillers including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and a diltiazem hydrochloride, are provided in the below table.
  • the following process employs a combination of blending . and direct compression techniques.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • a calcium channel blocker e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride
  • suitable blenders include, for example, V-B lenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart Corp).
  • the resulting blend is mixed with microcrystalline cellulose, which may also be done in a suitable blender.
  • This blend is milled and screened in a Fitz mill (Fitzpatrick Corp) or other suitable mill, such as a Quadro Comill, oscillating mill, or pin mill, for example.
  • the resulting blend is mixed with the silicon dioxide, croscarmellose sodium, and magnesium stearate, which may also be accomplished in a suitable blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may calcium channel blockers other than diltiazem hydrochloride.
  • a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion.
  • Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and calcium channel blocker(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and diltiazem hydrochloride set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate (or other copper antagonist) may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 700 mg), and the amount of diltiazem hydrochloride may range from about 30 mg to about 240 mg
  • the amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the calcium channel blocker is included for treatment or prevention of chest pain and high blood pressure, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared by direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), together with one or more desiccants, which may be prepared by direct compression.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or tri
  • ingredients for tablets with desiccant(s) including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and a diltiazem hydrochloride, are provided in the below table.
  • the following process employs compaction, blending and direct compression.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • calcium channel blocker(s) e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride
  • a desiccant e.g. anhydrous sodium phosphate
  • suitable blenders include, for example, v-blenders (Patterson-Kelly), planetary blenders (Hobart).
  • This blend is compacted in a suitable roller compacter, such as a Vector Mini-model TF. It is then milled and screened in a Fitz mill or other suitable mill. Suitable mills include a Quadro Comill, oscillating mills, and pin mills, for example.
  • the resulting blend is blended with a calcium channel blocker (e.g. diltiazem hydrochloride), silicon dioxide and magnesium stearate in a suitable blender.
  • the final blend is compacted into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may calcium channel blockers other than diltiazem hydrochloride. Additionally, in certain cases, a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion. Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and calcium channel blocker(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and diltiazem hydrochloride set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 700 mg), and the amount of diltiazem hydrochloride may range from about 30 mg to about 240 mg (for example, 30 mg, 40 mg, 50 mg, 60 mg, 120 mg, and 240 mg). Other amounts may also be used. The amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the calcium channel blocker is included for treatment or prevention of chest pain and high blood pressure, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • EXAMPLE 28 is generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.
  • This Example describes preparation of tablets having a copper antagonist(s), for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), which may be prepared by wet granulation.
  • a copper antagonist(s) for example, one or more copper chelators ⁇ e.g., a trientine, such as triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate), and one or more calcium channel blockers (e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride), which may be prepared by wet granulation.
  • ingredients for tablets with wet granulation binder(s) and including, for example, triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and a diltiazem hydrochloride, are provided in the below table.
  • the following tablet is prepared using wet granulation methods.
  • the copper antagonist(s) e.g., triethylenetetramine disuccinate
  • a calcium channel blocker(s) e.g., diltiazem hydrochloride
  • lactose lactose
  • dicalcium phosphate in a suitable fluid bed granulator/dryer.
  • Suitable granulator/dryers include Glatt or Niro fluid bed granulator/dryers.
  • the hydroxypropylcellulose is dissolved in water or ethanol.
  • the triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride may be precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein, e.g., calcium, to enhance stability.
  • the blend is wet granulated with the solution of hydroxypropylcellulose in the suitable granulator/dryer.
  • the wet granulation is dried in the granulator dryer.
  • this granulation can be prepared by blending the copper antagonist(s) with lactose and dicalcium phosphate and wet granulating with the hydroxypropylcellulose solution in a Niro or Glatt high speed granulator and drying it in a Glatt fluid bed dryer.
  • This final granulation is mixed with the crosscarmellose sodium and magnesium stearate or other lubricant in a suitable blender, such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • a suitable blender such as Patterson Kelly V-blender.
  • the final blend is compressed into tablets on a suitable tablet machine, such as a Manesty beta-press.
  • Copper antagonists other than triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may be used, as may calcium channel blockers other than diltiazem hydrochloride. Additionally, in certain cases, a copper antagonist compound which has already been considerably precomplexed with a non-copper metal ion as disclosed herein may also be used, for example, a triethylenetetramine precomplexed with calcium or another non-copper metal ion. Pentacoordinate copper antagonists may also be used, including for example, a triethylenetetramine complexed with calcium (or another non-copper metal ion) and another complexing agent, such as, for example, chloride, as disclosed herein.
  • Amounts of the copper antagonist(s) and calcium channel blocker(s), including the amounts of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate and diltiazem hydrochloride set forth in this Example, may be varied, as appropriate.
  • the amount of triethylenetetramine dihydrochloride or triethylenetetramine disuccinate may range from about 1 mg to about 750 mg (for example, 1 mg, 5 mg, 10 mg, 25 mg, 50 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, 150 mg 200 mg, 250 mg, 400 mg, 500 mg, 600 mg, and 700 mg), and the amount of diltiazem hydrochloride may range from about 30 mg to about 240 mg (for example, 30 mg, 40 mg, 50 mg, 60 mg, 120 mg, and 240 mg). Other amounts may also be used. The amounts are not inflexible and may be determined, in part, for example, based on the number of tablets to be taken per day, whether the calcium channel blocker is included for treatment or prevention of chest pain and high blood pressure, etc.
  • the tablet may be prepared for administration of drug, by way of example, in one or more doses, for example one or two or more tablets once, twice, or more per day. Tablets are generally prepared for administration no more than four times per day, preferably less, and most preferably one or two times per day.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)

Abstract

La présente invention propose des compositions pharmaceutiques comprenant un ou des antagonistes du cuivre pharmaceutiquement acceptables, ou des sels ou prémédicaments pharmaceutiquement acceptables de ceux-ci, y compris des antagonistes du cuivre (II), et un agent antihypertensif pharmaceutiquement acceptable ou un sel ou prémédicament pharmaceutiquement acceptable de celui-ci. L'invention propose également des articles, des kits et des appareils de délivrance contenant les compositions, des tablettes, des capsules et des formulations contenant de telles compositions et des procédés d'utilisation pour le traitement de sujets, y compris des humains, qui sont atteints, ou risquent d'être atteints, de divers états, troubles ou maladies.
PCT/NZ2006/000059 2005-03-26 2006-03-27 Compositions d'antagonistes du cuivre Ceased WO2006104402A1 (fr)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US66552205P 2005-03-26 2005-03-26
US60/665,522 2005-03-26

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2006104402A1 true WO2006104402A1 (fr) 2006-10-05

Family

ID=37053611

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/NZ2006/000059 Ceased WO2006104402A1 (fr) 2005-03-26 2006-03-27 Compositions d'antagonistes du cuivre

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2006104402A1 (fr)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003007686A2 (fr) * 2001-07-19 2003-01-30 Dmi Biosciences, Inc. Utilisation de chelateurs de cuivre pour inhiber l'inactivation de la proteine c
WO2003017992A2 (fr) * 2001-08-22 2003-03-06 Cambridge Theranostics Ltd Moyens pour traiter l'atherosclerose
WO2003077901A1 (fr) * 2002-03-08 2003-09-25 Protemix Corporation Limited Prevention et/ou traitement de maladie cardio-vasculaire et/ou d'insuffisance cardiaque connexe
WO2004017957A1 (fr) * 2002-08-20 2004-03-04 Protemix Corporation Limited Prevention et/ou traitement de maladies cardio-vasculaires et/ou insuffisance cardiaque associee

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003007686A2 (fr) * 2001-07-19 2003-01-30 Dmi Biosciences, Inc. Utilisation de chelateurs de cuivre pour inhiber l'inactivation de la proteine c
WO2003017992A2 (fr) * 2001-08-22 2003-03-06 Cambridge Theranostics Ltd Moyens pour traiter l'atherosclerose
WO2003077901A1 (fr) * 2002-03-08 2003-09-25 Protemix Corporation Limited Prevention et/ou traitement de maladie cardio-vasculaire et/ou d'insuffisance cardiaque connexe
WO2004017957A1 (fr) * 2002-08-20 2004-03-04 Protemix Corporation Limited Prevention et/ou traitement de maladies cardio-vasculaires et/ou insuffisance cardiaque associee

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11419831B2 (en) Dosage forms and related therapies
US20050159364A1 (en) Copper antagonist compounds
JP2019218389A (ja) 代謝障害を治療するための組成物および方法
EA010295B1 (ru) Соединения амфетамина с пониженной способностью вызывать злоупотребление ими
KR20140043755A (ko) ２형 당뇨병의 치료를 위한 릭시세나티드 및 메트포르민
JP2018087214A (ja) スタチン、ビグアナイド、およびさらなる薬剤を含む心血管代謝性リスクを減少させるための組成物
WO2006104401A1 (fr) Compositions antagonistes du cuivre
ES2744495T3 (es) Preparación farmacéutica sólida
EP4216942A1 (fr) Compositions pharmaceutiques antidiabétiques et leur procédé de préparation
TWI327468B (en) Pharmaceutical composition
US20090093542A1 (en) Copper antagonist compositions
WO2006104397A1 (fr) Compositions antagonistes du cuivre
WO2006104400A1 (fr) Compositions antagonistes du cuivre
WO2006104396A1 (fr) Compositions antagonistes du cuivre pre-complexees
WO2006104402A1 (fr) Compositions d'antagonistes du cuivre
US20090093506A1 (en) Copper antagonist compositions
WO2006104399A1 (fr) Compositions antagonistes du cuivre
WO2006104398A1 (fr) Compositions antagonistes du cuivre
US20100008956A1 (en) Composition and combinations of carboxylic acid losartan in dosage forms
US20100189797A1 (en) Oral antidepressant formulation
US20060269596A1 (en) Controlled release compositions comprising an acylanilide
JP2004513877A (ja) 放出制御アルギニン製剤
NZ539695A (en) Dosage forms and related therapies
US20210361582A1 (en) Colchicine salicylate derivatives and methods of treatment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: RU

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 06733148

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1